ATMEGA161L-4PI [ATMEL]

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, 4MHz, CMOS, PDIP40, 0.600 INCH, PLASTIC, MS-011AC, DIP-40;
ATMEGA161L-4PI
型号: ATMEGA161L-4PI
厂家: ATMEL    ATMEL
描述:

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, 4MHz, CMOS, PDIP40, 0.600 INCH, PLASTIC, MS-011AC, DIP-40

时钟 ATM 异步传输模式 微控制器 光电二极管 外围集成电路
文件: 总159页 (文件大小:1662K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Features  
High-performance, Low-power AVR® 8-bit Microcontroller  
Advanced RISC Architecture  
– 130 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clock Cycle Execution  
– 32 x 8 General Purpose Working Registers  
– Fully Static Operation  
– Up to 8 MIPS Throughput at 8 MHz  
– On-chip 2-cycle Multiplier  
Program and Data Memories  
– 16K Bytes of Non-volatile In-System Programmable Flash Endurance: 1,000  
Write/Erase Cycles  
– Optional Boot Code Memory with Independent Lock bits Self-programming of  
Program and Data Memories  
8-bit  
Microcontroller  
with 16K Bytes  
of In-System  
Programmable  
Flash  
– 512 Bytes of Non-volatile In-System Programmable EEPROM Endurance: 100,000  
Write/Erase Cycles  
– 1K Byte of Internal SRAM  
– Programming Lock for Software Security  
Peripheral Features  
– Two 8-bit Timer/Counters with Separate Prescaler and PWM  
– Expanded 16-bit Timer/Counter System with Separate Prescaler, Compare,  
Capture Modes and Dual 8-, 9-, or 10-bit PWM  
– Dual Programmable Serial UARTs  
– Master/Slave SPI Serial Interface  
– Real-time Counter with Separate Oscillator  
– Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator  
– On-chip Analog Comparator  
ATmega161  
ATmega161L  
Special Microcontroller Features  
– Power-on Reset  
– External and Internal Interrupt Sources  
– Three Sleep Modes: Idle, Power-save and Power-down  
Power Comsumption at 4 MHz, 3.0V, 25°C  
– Active 3.0 mA  
– Idle Mode 1.2 mA  
– Power-down Mode < 1 µA  
I/O and Packages  
– 35 Programmable I/O Lines  
– 40-lead PDIP and 44-lead TQFP  
Operating Voltages  
– 2.7V - 5.5V for the ATmega161L  
– 4.0V - 5.5V for the ATmega161  
Speed Grades  
– 0 - 4 MHz for the ATmega161L  
– 0 - 8 MHz for the ATmega161  
Commercial and Industrial Temperature Ranges  
Disclaimer  
Typical values contained in this data sheet are based on simulations and characteriza-  
tion of other AVR microcontrollers manufactured on the same process technology.  
Min and Max values will be available after the device is characterized.  
Note:  
Not recommended in new  
designs.  
Rev. 1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
Pin Configuration  
PDIP  
(OC0/T0) PB0  
(OC2/T1) PB1  
(RXD1/AIN0) PB2  
(TXD1/AIN1) PB3  
(SS) PB4  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
40 VCC  
39 PA0 (AD0)  
38 PA1 (AD1)  
37 PA2 (AD2)  
36 PA3 (AD3)  
35 PA4 (AD4)  
34 PA5 (AD5)  
33 PA6 (AD6)  
32 PA7 (AD7)  
31 PE0 (ICP/INT2)  
30 PE1 (ALE)  
29 PE2 (OC1B)  
28 PC7 (A15)  
27 PC6 (A14)  
26 PC5 (A13)  
25 PC4 (A12)  
24 PC3 (A11)  
23 PC2 (A10)  
22 PC1 (A9)  
21 PC0 (A8)  
(MOSI) PB5  
(MISO) PB6  
(SCK) PB7  
RESET  
(RXD0) PD0 10  
(TXD0) PD1 11  
(INT0) PD2 12  
(INT1) PD3 13  
(TOSC1) PD4 14  
(OC1A/TOSC2) PD5 15  
(WR) PD6 16  
(RD) PD7 17  
XTAL2 18  
XTAL1 19  
GND 20  
TQFP  
(MOSI) PB5  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
33 PA4 (AD4)  
(MISO) PB6  
(SCK) PB7  
RESET  
32 PA5 (AD5)  
31 PA6 (AD6)  
30 PA7 (AD7)  
29 PE0 (ICP/INT2)  
28 NC*  
(RXD0) PD0  
NC*  
(TXD0) PD1  
(INT0) PD2  
(INT1) PD3  
27 PE1 (ALE)  
26 PE2 (OC1B)  
25 PC7 (A15)  
24 PC6 (A14)  
23 PC5 (A13)  
(TOSC1) PD4 10  
(OCIA/TOSC2) PD5 11  
* NC = Do not connect  
(Can be used in future devices)  
2
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Description  
The ATmega161 is a low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontroller based on the AVR RISC  
architecture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the ATmega161  
achieves throughputs approaching 1 MIPS per MHz allowing the system designer to  
optimize power consumption versus processing speed. The AVR core combines a rich  
instruction set with 32 general purpose working registers. All the 32 registers are directly  
connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two independent registers to be  
accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting architec-  
ture is more code-efficient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster than  
conventional CISC microcontrollers.  
The ATmega161 provides the following features: 16K bytes of In-System or Self-  
programmable Flash, 512 bytes EEPROM, 1K byte of SRAM, 35 general purpose I/O  
lines, 32 general purpose working registers, Real-time Counter, three flexible  
Timer/Counters with Compare modes, internal and external interrupts, two programma-  
ble serial UARTs, programmable Watchdog Timer with internal Oscillator, an SPI serial  
port and three software-selectable power saving modes. The Idle mode stops the CPU  
while allowing the SRAM, Timer/Counters, SPI port and interrupt system to continue  
functioning. The Power-down mode saves the register and SRAM contents but freezes  
the Oscillator, disabling all other chip functions until the next External Interrupt or Hard-  
ware Reset. In Power-save mode, the timer Oscillator continues to run, allowing the  
user to maintain a timer base while the rest of the device is sleeping.  
The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high-density non-volatile memory technology.  
The On-chip Flash Program memory can be reprogrammed using the Self-programming  
capability through the Boot Block and an ISP through the SPI port, or by using a conven-  
tional non-volatile Memory programmer. By combining an enhanced RISC 8-bit CPU  
with In-System Programmable Flash on a monolithic chip, the Atmel ATmega161 is a  
powerful microcontroller that provides a highly flexible and cost-effective solution to  
many embedded control applications.  
The ATmega161 AVR is supported with a full suite of program and system development  
tools including: C compilers, macro assemblers, program debugger/simulators, In-Cir-  
cuit Emulators and evaluation kits.  
3
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Block Diagram  
Figure 1. The ATmega161 Block Diagram  
PC0-PC7  
PA0-PA7  
VCC  
PORTA DRIVERS  
PORTC DRIVERS  
GND  
DATA REGISTER  
PORTA  
DATA DIR.  
REG. PORTA  
DATA REGISTER  
PORTC  
DATA DIR.  
REG. PORTC  
8-BIT DATA BUS  
XTAL1  
XTAL2  
INTERNAL  
OSCILLATOR  
OSCILLATOR  
PROGRAM  
COUNTER  
STACK  
POINTER  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
TIMING AND  
CONTROL  
RESET  
PROGRAM  
FLASH  
MCU CONTROL  
REGISTER  
SRAM  
INSTRUCTION  
REGISTER  
GENERAL  
PURPOSE  
REGISTERS  
TIMER/  
COUNTERS  
X
Y
Z
INSTRUCTION  
DECODER  
INTERRUPT  
UNIT  
CONTROL  
LINES  
ALU  
EEPROM  
STATUS  
REGISTER  
PROGRAMMING  
LOGIC  
SPI  
UARTS  
DATA DIR  
REG. PORTE  
DATA REG.  
PORTE  
DATA REGISTER  
PORTD  
DATA DIR.  
REG. PORTD  
DATA REGISTER  
PORTB  
DATA DIR.  
REG. PORTB  
PORTE DRIVERS  
PORTD DRIVERS  
PORTB DRIVERS  
PB0 - PB7  
PE0 - PE2  
PD0 - PD7  
4
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Pin Descriptions  
VCC  
Supply voltage.  
Ground.  
GND  
Port A (PA7..PA0)  
Port A is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port. Port pins can provide internal pull-up resistors  
(selected for each bit). The Port A output buffers can sink 20 mA and can drive LED dis-  
plays directly. When pins PA0 to PA7 are used as inputs and are externally pulled low,  
they will source current if the internal pull-up resistors are activated. The Port A pins are  
tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Port A serves as a Multiplexed Address/Data port when using external memory  
interface.  
Port B (PB7..PB0)  
Port B is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors. The Port B output  
buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs, Port B pins that are externally pulled low will source  
current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset  
condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Port B also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega161 as listed  
on page 92.  
Port C (PC7..PC0)  
Port D (PD7..PD0)  
Port C is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors. The Port C output  
buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs, Port C pins that are externally pulled low will source  
current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port C pins are tri-stated when a reset  
condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Port C also serves as an address high output when using external memory interface.  
Port D is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors. The Port D output  
buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs, Port D pins that are externally pulled low will source  
current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port D pins are tri-stated when a reset  
condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Port D also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega161 as listed  
on page 101.  
Port E (PE2..PE0)  
Port E is a 3-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors. The Port E output  
buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs, Port E pins that are externally pulled low will source  
current if the pull-up resistors are activated. The Port E pins are tri-stated when a reset  
condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Port E also serves the functions of various special features of the ATmega161 as listed  
on page 107.  
RESET  
Reset input. A low level on this pin for more than 500 ns will generate a Reset, even if  
the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a Reset.  
XTAL1  
XTAL2  
Input to the inverting Oscillator amplifier and input to the internal clock operating circuit.  
Output from the inverting Oscillator amplifier.  
5
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Crystal Oscillator  
XTAL1 and XTAL2 are input and output, respectively, of an inverting amplifier that can  
be configured for use as an on-chip Oscillator, as shown in Figure 2. Either a quartz  
crystal or a ceramic resonator may be used. To drive the device from an external clock  
source, XTAL2 should be left unconnected while XTAL1 is driven as shown in Figure 3.  
Figure 2. Oscillator Connections  
C2  
XTAL2  
C1  
XTAL1  
GND  
Figure 3. External Clock Drive Configuration  
NC  
XTAL2  
EXTERNAL  
OSCILLATOR  
SIGNAL  
XTAL1  
GND  
6
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Architectural  
Overview  
The fast-access Register File concept contains 32 x 8-bit general purpose working reg-  
isters with a single clock cycle access time. This means that during one single clock  
cycle, one Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation is executed. Two operands are output  
from the Register File, the operation is executed and the result is stored back in the  
Register File – in one clock cycle.  
Six of the 32 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for  
Data Space addressing – enabling efficient address calculations. One of the three  
address pointers is also used as the address pointer for the constant table look-up func-  
tion. These added function registers are the 16-bit X-register, Y-register and Z-register.  
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic functions between registers or between a con-  
stant and a register. Single register operations are also executed in the ALU. Figure 4  
shows the ATmega161 AVR RISC microcontroller architecture.  
Figure 4. The ATmega161 AVR RISC Architecture  
Data Bus 8-bit  
Program  
Counter  
Status  
and Control  
Interrupt  
Unit  
8K x 16  
Program  
Memory  
SPI  
Unit  
32 x 8  
General  
Purpose  
Registers  
Instruction  
Register  
Serial  
UART0  
Instruction  
Decoder  
Serial  
UART1  
ALU  
Control Lines  
8-bit  
Timer/Counter  
with PWM  
and RTC  
16-bit  
Timer/Counter  
with PWM  
1024 x 8  
Data  
SRAM  
8-bit  
Timer/Counter  
with PWM  
512 x 8  
EEPROM  
Watchdog  
Timer  
32  
I/O Lines  
Analog  
Comparator  
7
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
In addition to the register operation, the conventional Memory Addressing modes can be  
used on the Register File. This is enabled by the fact that the Register File is assigned  
the 32 lowermost Data Space addresses ($00 - $1F), allowing them to be accessed as  
though they were ordinary memory locations.  
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions such as  
Control Registers, Timer/Counters, and other I/O functions. The I/O memory can be  
accessed directly or as the Data Space locations following those of the Register File,  
$20 - $5F.  
The AVR uses a Harvard architecture concept – with separate memories and buses for  
program and data. The Program memory is executed with a two-stage pipeline. While  
one instruction is being executed, the next instruction is pre-fetched from the Program  
memory. This concept enables instructions to be executed in every clock cycle. The  
Program memory is Self-programmable Flash memory.  
With the jump and call instructions, the whole 8K word address space is directly  
accessed. Most AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word format. Every Program  
memory address contains a 16- or 32-bit instruction.  
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is  
stored on the Stack. The Stack is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM and,  
consequently, the Stack size is only limited by the total SRAM size and the usage of the  
SRAM. All user programs must initialize the SP (Stack Pointer) in the reset routine  
(before subroutines or interrupts are executed). The 16-bit Stack Pointer is read/write  
accessible in the I/O space.  
The 1K byte data SRAM can be easily accessed through the five different Addressing  
modes supported in the AVR architecture.  
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.  
8
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 5. Memory Maps  
Program Memory  
Data Memory  
$0000  
$000  
32 Gen. Purpose  
Working Registers  
$001F  
$0020  
64 I/O Registers  
Program Flash  
(8K x 16)  
$005F  
$0060  
Internal SRAM  
(1024 x 8)  
$045F  
$0460  
External SRAM  
(0 - 63K x 8)  
$1FFF  
$FFFF  
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional  
global interrupt enable bit in the Status Register. All the different interrupts have a sepa-  
rate Interrupt Vector in the Interrupt Vector table at the beginning of the Program  
memory. The different interrupts have priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector  
position. The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher the priority.  
9
1228D–AVR–02/07  
The General Purpose  
Register File  
Figure 6 shows the structure of the 32 general purpose working registers in the CPU.  
Figure 6. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers  
7
0
Addr.  
$00  
R0  
R1  
$01  
R2  
$02  
R13  
R14  
R15  
R16  
R17  
$0D  
$0E  
$0F  
$10  
$11  
General  
Purpose  
Working  
Registers  
R26  
R27  
R28  
R29  
R30  
R31  
$1A  
$1B  
$1C  
$1D  
$1E  
$1F  
X-register Low Byte  
X-register High Byte  
Y-register Low Byte  
Y-register High Byte  
Z-register Low Byte  
Z-register High Byte  
All the register operating instructions in the instruction set have direct and single cycle  
access to all registers. The only exceptions are the five constant arithmetic and logic  
instructions SBCI, SUBI, CPI, ANDI, and ORI between a constant and a register, and  
the LDI instruction for load immediate constant data. These instructions apply to the  
second half of the registers in the Register File – R16..R31. The general SBC, SUB, CP,  
AND, and OR, and all other operations between two registers or on a single register  
apply to the entire Register File.  
As shown in Figure 6, each register is also assigned a Data memory address, mapping  
them directly into the first 32 locations of the user Data Space. Although not being phys-  
ically implemented as SRAM locations, this memory organization provides great  
flexibility in access of the registers, as the X-, Y-, and Z-registers can be set to index any  
register in the file.  
The X-register, Y-register and The registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage.  
Z-register  
These registers are address pointers for indirect addressing of the Data Space. The  
three indirect address registers X, Y, and Z are defined as:  
Figure 7. X-, Y-, and Z-registers  
15  
0
X-register  
7
0
7
0
R27 ($1B)  
R26 ($1A)  
15  
0
Y-register  
Z-register  
7
0
0
7
0
R29 ($1D)  
R28 ($1C)  
15  
0
7
7
0
R31 ($1F)  
R30 ($1E)  
10  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
In the different Addressing modes, these address registers have functions as fixed dis-  
placement, automatic increment and decrement (see the descriptions for the different  
instructions).  
ALU – Arithmetic Logic  
Unit  
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 32 general  
purpose working registers. Within a single clock cycle, ALU operations between regis-  
ters in the Register File are executed. The ALU operations are divided into three main  
categories – arithmetic, logical and bit functions. ATmega161 also provides a powerful  
multiplier supporting both signed/unsigned multiplication and fractional format. See the  
Instruction Set section for a detailed description.  
Self-programmableFlash The ATmega161 contains 16K bytes of On-chip Self-programmable and In-System Pro-  
grammable Flash memory for program storage. Since all instructions are 16- or 32-bit  
Program Memory  
words, the Flash is organized as 8K x 16. The Flash memory has an endurance of at  
least 1,000 write/erase cycles. The ATmega161 Program Counter (PC) is 13 bits wide,  
thus addressing the 8,192 Program memory locations.  
See page 110 for a detailed description of Flash data downloading.  
See page 13 for the different Program Memory Addressing modes.  
EEPROM Data Memory  
The ATmega161 contains 512 bytes of data EEPROM memory. It is organized as a sep-  
arate data space in which single bytes can be read and written. The EEPROM has an  
endurance of at least 100,000 write/erase cycles per location. The interface between the  
EEPROM and the CPU is described on page 60, specifying the EEPROM Address Reg-  
isters, the EEPROM Data Register and the EEPROM Control Register.  
For the SPI data downloading, see page 125 for a detailed description.  
11  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
 
SRAM Data Memory  
Figure 8 shows how the ATmega161 SRAM memory is organized.  
Figure 8. SRAM Organization  
Register File  
Data Address Space  
R0  
R1  
R2  
$0000  
$0001  
$0002  
R29  
R30  
$001D  
$001E  
$001F  
R31  
I/O Registers  
$00  
$0020  
$0021  
$0022  
$01  
$02  
$3D  
$3E  
$3F  
$005D  
$005E  
$005F  
Internal SRAM  
$0060  
$0061  
$045E  
$045F  
The lower 1120 Data memory locations address the Register File, the I/O memory and  
the internal data SRAM. The first 96 locations address the Register File and I/O memory  
and the next 1K locations address the internal data SRAM. An optional external Data  
memory device can be placed in the same SRAM memory space. This memory device  
will occupy the locations following the internal SRAM and up to as much as 64K - 1,  
depending on external memory size.  
When the addresses accessing the Data memory space exceed the internal data SRAM  
locations, the memory device is accessed using the same instructions as for the internal  
data SRAM access. When the internal data space is accessed, the read and write  
strobe pins (RD and WR) are inactive during the whole access cycle. External memory  
operation is enabled by setting the SRE bit in the MCUCR Register. See “Interface to  
External Memory” on page 84 for details.  
Accessing external memory takes one additional clock cycle per byte compared to  
access of the internal SRAM. This means that the commands LD, ST, LDS, STS,  
PUSH, and POP take one additional clock cycle. If the Stack is placed in external mem-  
ory, interrupts, subroutine calls and returns take two clock cycles extra because the 2-  
byte Program Counter is pushed and popped. When external memory interface is used  
with wait state, two additional clock cycles are used per byte. This has the following  
effect: Data transfer instructions take two extra clock cycles, whereas interrupt, subrou-  
tine calls and returns will need four clock cycles more than specified in the Instruction  
Set manual.  
12  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
The five different Addressing modes for the Data memory cover: Direct, Indirect with  
Displacement, Indirect, Indirect with Pre-decrement and Indirect with Post-increment. In  
the Register File, registers R26 to R31 feature the indirect Addressing Pointer  
Registers.  
The direct addressing reaches the entire data space.  
The Indirect with Displacement mode features a 63-address locations reach from the  
base address given by the Y- or Z-register.  
When using Register Indirect Addressing modes with automatic pre-decrement and  
post-increment, the address registers X, Y, and Z are decremented and incremented.  
The 32 general purpose working registers, 64 I/O Registers and the 1K byte of internal  
data SRAM in the ATmega161 are all accessible through all these Addressing modes.  
See the next section for a detailed description of the different Addressing modes.  
Program and Data  
Addressing Modes  
The ATmega161 AVR RISC microcontroller supports powerful and efficient Addressing  
modes for access to the Program memory (Flash) and Data memory (SRAM, Register  
File and I/O memory). This section describes the different Addressing modes supported  
by the AVR architecture. In the figures, OP means the operation code part of the instruc-  
tion word. To simplify, not all figures show the exact location of the addressing bits.  
Register Direct, Single  
Register Rd  
Figure 9. Direct Single Register Addressing  
REGISTER FILE  
0
15  
4
0
OP  
d
d
31  
The operand is contained in register d (Rd).  
Register Direct, Two Registers Figure 10. Direct Register Addressing, Two Registers  
Rd and Rr  
REGISTER FILE  
0
15  
9
5 4  
0
OP  
r
d
d
r
31  
13  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Operands are contained in registers r (Rr) and d (Rd). The result is stored in register d  
(Rd).  
I/O Direct  
Figure 11. I/O Direct Addressing  
I/O MEMORY  
0
15  
5
0
OP  
n
P
63  
Operand address is contained in six bits of the instruction word. n is the destination or  
Source Register Address.  
Data Direct  
Figure 12. Direct Data Addressing  
Data Space  
$0000  
20 19  
31  
16  
0
OP  
Rr/Rd  
16 LSBs  
15  
$FFFF  
A 16-bit data address is contained in the 16 LSBs of a two-word instruction. Rd/Rr spec-  
ify the destination or source register.  
14  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Data Indirect with  
Displacement  
Figure 13. Data Indirect with Displacement  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
Y OR Z - REGISTER  
15  
10  
6 5  
0
OP  
n
a
$FFFF  
Operand address is the result of the Y- or Z-register contents added to the address con-  
tained in six bits of the instruction word.  
Data Indirect  
Figure 14. Data Indirect Addressing  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
X, Y, OR Z - REGISTER  
$FFFF  
Operand address is the contents of the X-, Y-, or Z-register.  
Data Indirect with Pre-  
decrement  
Figure 15. Data Indirect Addressing with Pre-decrement  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
X, Y, OR Z - REGISTER  
-1  
$FFFF  
The X-, Y-, or Z-register is decremented before the operation. Operand address is the  
decremented contents of the X-, Y-, or Z-register.  
15  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Data Indirect with Post-  
increment  
Figure 16. Data Indirect Addressing with Post-increment  
Data Space  
$0000  
15  
0
X, Y, OR Z - REGISTER  
1
$FFFF  
The X-, Y-, or Z-register is incremented after the operation. Operand address is the con-  
tents of the X-, Y-, or Z-register prior to incrementing.  
Constant Addressing Using  
the LPM Instruction  
Figure 17. Code Memory Constant Addressing  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
$000  
15  
1 0  
Z-REGISTER  
$1FFF  
Constant byte address is specified by the Z-register contents. The 15 MSBs select word  
address (0 - 8K), the LSB selects Low byte if cleared (LSB = 0) or High byte if set  
(LSB = 1).  
Indirect Program Addressing, Figure 18. Indirect Program Memory Addressing  
IJMP and ICALL  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
$000  
15  
0
Z-REGISTER  
$1FFF  
16  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Program execution continues at address contained by the Z-register (i.e., the PC is  
loaded with the contents of the Z-register).  
Relative Program Addressing, Figure 19. Relative Program Memory Addressing  
RJMP and RCALL  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
$000  
15  
0
PC  
0
15  
12 11  
OP  
k
$1FFF  
Program execution continues at address PC + k + 1. The relative address k is -2048 to  
2047.  
Direct Program Addressing,  
JMP and CALL  
Figure 20. Direct Program Addressing  
PROGRAM MEMORY  
$0000  
31  
15  
16  
0
21 20  
OP  
16 LSBs  
$1FFF  
Program execution continues at the address immediate in the instruction words.  
Memory Access Times  
and Instruction  
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution and  
internal memory access.  
Execution Timing  
The AVR CPU is driven by the System Clock Ø, directly generated from the external  
clock crystal for the chip. No internal clock division is used.  
Figure 21 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by  
the Harvard architecture and the fast-access Register File concept. This is the basic  
pipelining concept to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with the corresponding unique results  
for functions per cost, functions per clocks and functions per power unit.  
17  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Figure 21. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
System Clock Ø  
1st Instruction Fetch  
1st Instruction Execute  
2nd Instruction Fetch  
2nd Instruction Execute  
3rd Instruction Fetch  
3rd Instruction Execute  
4th Instruction Fetch  
Figure 22 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock cycle  
an ALU operation using two register operands is executed and the result is stored back  
to the destination register.  
Figure 22. Single Cycle ALU Operation  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
System Clock Ø  
Total Execution Time  
Register Operands Fetch  
ALU Operation Execute  
Result Write Back  
The internal data SRAM access is performed in two System Clock cycles as described  
in Figure 23.  
Figure 23. On-chip Data SRAM Access Cycles  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
System Clock Ø  
Prev. Address  
Address  
Address  
Data  
WR  
Data  
RD  
18  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
l/O Memory  
The I/O space definition of the ATmega161 is shown in Table 1.  
Table 1. ATmega161 I/O Space(1)  
I/O Address  
(SRAM Address)  
$3F($5F)  
$3E ($5E)  
$3D ($5D)  
$3B ($5B)  
$3A ($5A)  
$39 ($59)  
$38 ($58)  
$37 ($57)  
$36 ($56)  
$35 ($55)  
$34 ($54)  
$33 ($53)  
$32 ($52)  
$31 ($51)  
$30 ($50)  
$2F ($4F)  
$2E ($4E)  
$2D ($4D)  
$2C ($4C)  
$2B ($4B)  
$2A ($4A)  
$29 ($49)  
$28 ($48)  
$27 ($47)  
$26 ($46)  
$25 ($45)  
$24 ($44)  
$23 ($43)  
$22 ($42)  
$21 ($41)  
$20 ($40)  
$1F ($3F)  
$1E ($3E)  
$1D ($3D)  
Name  
Function  
SREG  
Status REGister  
SPH  
Stack Pointer High  
SPL  
Stack Pointer Low  
GIMSK  
GIFR  
General Interrupt MaSK Register  
General Interrupt Flag Register  
Timer/Counter Interrupt MaSK Register  
Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register  
Store Program Memory Control Register  
Extended MCU general Control Register  
MCU general Control Register  
TIMSK  
TIFR  
SPMCR  
EMCUCR  
MCUCR  
MCUSR  
TCCR0  
TCNT0  
OCR0  
MCU general Status Register  
Timer/Counter0 Control Register  
Timer/Counter0 (8-bit)  
Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register  
Special Function IO Register  
SFIOR  
TCCR1A  
TCCR1B  
TCNT1H  
TCNT1L  
OCR1AH  
OCR1AL  
OCR1BH  
OCR1BL  
TCCR2  
ASSR  
Timer/Counter1 Control Register A  
Timer/Counter1 Control Register B  
Timer/Counter1 High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Low Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterA High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterA Low Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterB High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Output Compare RegisterB Low Byte  
Timer/Counter2 Control Register  
Asynchronous mode StatuS Register  
Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Register High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Register Low Byte  
Timer/Counter2 (8-bit)  
ICR1H  
ICR1L  
TCNT2  
OCR2  
Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register  
Watchdog Timer Control Register  
UART Baud Register HIgh  
WDTCR  
UBRRHI  
EEARH  
EEARL  
EEDR  
EEPROM Address Register High  
EEPROM Address Register Low  
EEPROM Data Register  
19  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Table 1. ATmega161 I/O Space(1) (Continued)  
I/O Address  
(SRAM Address)  
$1C ($3C)  
$1B($3B)  
$1A ($3A)  
$19 ($39)  
$18 ($38)  
$17 ($37)  
$16 ($36)  
$15 ($35)  
$14 ($34)  
$13 ($33)  
$12 ($32)  
$11 ($31)  
$10 ($30)  
$0F ($2F)  
$0E ($2E)  
$0D ($2D)  
$0C ($2C)  
$0B ($2B)  
$0A ($2A)  
$09 ($29)  
$08 ($28)  
$07 ($27)  
$06 ($26)  
$05 ($25)  
$03 ($23)  
$02 ($22)  
$01 ($21)  
$00 ($20)  
Name  
Function  
EECR  
PORTA  
DDRA  
PINA  
EEPROM Control Register  
Data Register, Port A  
Data Direction Register, Port A  
Input Pins, Port A  
PORTB  
DDRB  
PINB  
Data Register, Port B  
Data Direction Register, Port B  
Input Pins, Port B  
PORTC  
DDRC  
PINC  
Data Register, Port C  
Data Direction Register, Port C  
Input Pins, Port C  
PORTD  
DDRD  
PIND  
Data Register, Port D  
Data Direction Register, Port D  
Input Pins, Port D  
SPDR  
SPSR  
SPI I/O Data Register  
SPI Status Register  
SPCR  
UDR0  
SPI Control Register  
UART0 I/O Data Register  
UART0 Control and Status Register  
UART0 Control and Status Register  
UART0 Baud Rate Register  
Analog Comparator Control and Status Register  
Data Register, Port E  
UCSR0A  
UCSR0B  
UBRR0  
ACSR  
PORTE  
DDRE  
PINE  
Data Direction Register, Port E  
Input Pins, Port E  
UDR1  
UART1 I/O Data Register  
UART1 Control and Status Register  
UART1 Control and Status Register  
UART1 Baud Rate Register  
UCSR1A  
UCSR1B  
UBRR1  
Note:  
1. Reserved and unused locations are not shown in this table.  
20  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
All ATmega161 I/Os and peripherals are placed in the I/O space. The I/O locations are  
accessed by the IN and OUT instructions transferring data between the 32 general pur-  
pose working registers and the I/O space. I/O Registers within the address range $00 -  
$1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these registers, the  
value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. Refer to  
the instruction set section for more details. When using the I/O specific commands IN  
and OUT, the I/O addresses $00 - $3F must be used. When addressing I/O Registers as  
SRAM, $20 must be added to this address. All I/O Register addresses throughout this  
document are shown with the SRAM address in parentheses.  
For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed.  
Reserved I/O memory addresses should never be written.  
Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical “1” to them. Note that the CBI  
and SBI instructions will operate on all bits in the I/O Register, writing a one back into  
any flag read as set, thus clearing the Flag. The CBI and SBI instructions work with reg-  
isters $00 to $1F only.  
The I/O and Peripherals Control Registers are explained in the following sections.  
The AVR Status Register (SREG) at I/O space location $3F ($5F) is defined as:  
Status Register – SREG  
Bit  
7
I
6
T
5
H
4
S
3
V
2
N
1
Z
0
C
$3F ($5F)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
SREG  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bit 7 I: Global Interrupt Enable  
The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set (one) for the interrupts to be enabled. The  
individual interrupt enable control is then performed in separate control registers. If the  
Global Interrupt Enable bit is cleared (zero), none of the interrupts are enabled indepen-  
dent of the individual interrupt enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an  
interrupt has occurred and is set by the RETI instruction to enable subsequent  
interrupts.  
• Bit 6 T: Bit Copy Storage  
The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source  
and destination for the operated bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be cop-  
ied into T by the BST instruction and a bit in T can be copied into a bit in a register in the  
Register File by the BLD instruction.  
• Bit 5 H: Half Carry Flag  
The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. See the  
Instruction Set description for detailed information.  
• Bit 4 S: Sign Bit, S = N V  
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Comple-  
ment Overflow Flag V. See the Instruction Set description for detailed information.  
• Bit 3 V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag  
The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See  
the Instruction Set Description for detailed information.  
21  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
• Bit 2 N: Negative Flag  
The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result after the different arithmetic and logic  
operations. See the Instruction Set description for detailed information.  
• Bit 1 Z: Zero Flag  
The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result after the different arithmetic and logic opera-  
tions. See the Instruction Set description for detailed information.  
• Bit 0 C: Carry Flag  
The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See the Instruction  
Set description for detailed information.  
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt rou-  
tine and restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by  
software.  
Stack Pointer – SP  
The ATmega161 Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space  
locations $3E ($5E) and $3D ($5D). As the ATmega161 supports up to 64-Kbyte mem-  
ory, all 16 bits are used.  
Bit  
15  
SP15  
SP7  
7
14  
SP14  
SP6  
6
13  
SP13  
SP5  
5
12  
SP12  
SP4  
4
11  
SP11  
SP3  
3
10  
SP10  
SP2  
2
9
SP9  
SP1  
1
8
SP8  
SP0  
0
$3E ($5E)  
$3D ($5D)  
SPH  
SPL  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine and Inter-  
rupt Stacks are located. This Stack space in the data SRAM must be defined by the  
program before any subroutine calls are executed or interrupts are enabled. The Stack  
Pointer must be set to point above $60. The Stack Pointer is decremented by 1 when  
data is pushed onto the Stack with the PUSH instruction, and it is decremented by 2  
when an address is pushed onto the Stack with subroutine calls and interrupts. The  
Stack Pointer is incremented by 1 when data is popped from the Stack with the POP  
instruction, and it is incremented by 2 when an address is popped from the Stack with  
return from subroutine RET or return from interrupt (RETI).  
Reset and Interrupt  
Handling  
The ATmega161 provides 20 different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the sepa-  
rate Reset Vector each have a separate Program Vector in the Program memory space.  
All interrupts are assigned individual enable bits that must be set (one) together with the  
I-bit in the Status Register in order to enable the interrupt.  
The lowest addresses in the Program memory space are automatically defined as the  
Reset and Interrupt vectors. The complete list of Vectors is shown in Table 2. The list  
also determines the priority levels of the different interrupts. The lower the address, the  
higher the priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next is INT0 (the External  
Interrupt Request 0) and so on.  
22  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 2. Reset and Interrupt Vectors(1)  
Vector  
No.  
Program Address Source  
Interrupt Definition  
1
$000  
RESET  
External Pin, Power-on Reset and  
Watchdog Reset  
2
3
$002  
$004  
$006  
$008  
$00a  
$00c  
$00e  
$010  
$012  
$014  
$016  
$018  
$01a  
$01c  
$01e  
$020  
$022  
$024  
$026  
$028  
INT0  
External Interrupt Request 0  
External Interrupt Request 1  
External Interrupt Request 2  
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match  
Timer/Counter2 Overflow  
INT1  
4
INT2  
5
TIMER2 COMP  
TIMER2 OVF  
TIMER1 CAPT  
TIMER1 COMPA  
6
7
Timer/Counter1 Capture Event  
Timer/Counter1 Compare Match A  
8
9
TIMER1 COMPB Timer/Counter1 Compare Match B  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
TIMER1 OVF  
TIMER0 COMP  
TIMER0 OVF  
SPI, STC  
Timer/Counter1 Overflow  
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match  
Timer/Counter0 Overflow  
Serial Transfer Complete  
UART0, Rx Complete  
UART0, RX  
UART1, RX  
UART0, UDRE  
UART1, UDRE  
UART0, TX  
UART1, TX  
EE_RDY  
UART1, Rx Complete  
UART0 Data Register Empty  
UART1 Data Register Empty  
UART0, Tx Complete  
UART1, Tx Complete  
EEPROM Ready  
ANA_COMP  
Analog Comparator  
Note:  
1. If BOOTRST fuse is programmed, the Reset Vector is located on program address  
$1e00, see Table 39 on page 112 for details.  
The most typical and general program setup for the Reset and Interrupt Vector  
addresses are:  
Address Labels  
Code  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
Comments  
$000  
RESET  
; Reset Handler  
$002  
EXT_INT0  
EXT_INT1  
EXT_INT2  
TIM2_COMP  
TIM2_OVF  
TIM1_CAPT  
TIM1_COMPA  
TIM1_COMPB  
TIM1_OVF  
TIM0_COMP  
TIM0_OVF  
SPI_STC;  
; IRQ0 Handler  
$004  
; IRQ1 Handler  
$006  
; IRQ2 Handler  
$008  
; Timer2 Compare Handler  
; Timer2 Overflow Handler  
; Timer1 Capture Handler  
; Timer1 CompareA Handler  
; Timer1 CompareB Handler  
; Timer1 Overflow Handler  
; Timer0 Compare Handler  
; Timer0 Overflow Handler  
; SPI Transfer Complete Handler  
$00a  
$00c  
$00e  
$010  
$012  
$014  
$016  
$018  
23  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
$01a  
$01c  
$01e  
$020  
$022  
$024  
$026  
$028  
;
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
UART_RXC0  
UART_RXC1  
UART_DRE0  
UART_DRE1  
UART_TXC0  
UART_TXC1  
EE_RDY  
; UART0 RX Complete Handler  
; UART1 RX Complete Handler  
; UDR0 Empty Handler  
; UDR1 Empty Handler  
; UART0 TX Complete Handler  
; UART1 TX Complete Handler  
; EEPROM Ready Handler  
ANA_COMP  
; Analog Comparator Handler  
$02a  
$02b  
$02c  
$02d  
$02e  
MAIN:  
ldi r16,high(RAMEND) ; Main program start  
out SPH,r16  
ldi r16,low(RAMEND)  
out SPL,r16  
<instr> xxx  
When the BOOTRST fuse is programmed, the most typical and general program setup  
for the Reset and Interrupt Vector addresses are:  
Address Labels  
.org $002  
$002  
Code  
Comments  
; Reset is located at $1e000  
; IRQ0 Handler  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
jmp  
EXT_INT0  
EXT_INT1  
EXT_INT2  
TIM2_COMP  
TIM2_OVF  
TIM1_CAPT  
TIM1_COMPA  
TIM1_COMPB  
TIM1_OVF  
TIM0_COMP  
TIM0_OVF  
SPI_STC;  
UART_RXC0  
UART_RXC1  
UART_DRE0  
UART_DRE1  
UART_TXC0  
UART_TXC1  
EE_RDY  
$004  
; IRQ1 Handler  
$006  
; IRQ2 Handler  
$008  
; Timer2 Compare Handler  
; Timer2 Overflow Handler  
; Timer1 Capture Handler  
; Timer1 CompareA Handler  
; Timer1 CompareB Handler  
; Timer1 Overflow Handler  
; Timer0 Compare Handler  
; Timer0 Overflow Handler  
; SPI Transfer Complete Handler  
; UART0 RX Complete Handler  
; UART1 RX Complete Handler  
; UDR0 Empty Handler  
$00a  
$00c  
$00e  
$010  
$012  
$014  
$016  
$018  
$01a  
$01c  
$01e  
$020  
; UDR1 Empty Handler  
$022  
; UART0 TX Complete Handler  
; UART1 TX Complete Handler  
; EEPROM Ready Handler  
; Analog Comparator Handler  
$024  
$026  
$028  
ANA_COMP  
;
$02a  
$02b  
$02c  
$02d  
$02e  
;
MAIN:  
ldi r16,high(RAMEND); Main program start  
out SPH,r16  
ldi r16,low(RAMEND)  
out SPL,r16  
<instr> xxx  
.org $1e00  
$1e00  
jmp  
RESET  
; Reset handler  
24  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Reset Sources  
The ATmega161 has three sources of Reset:  
Power-on Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the Power-on  
Reset threshold (VPOT).  
External Reset. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RESET pin for  
more than 500 ns.  
Watchdog Reset. The MCU is reset when the Watchdog Timer period expires and  
the Watchdog is enabled.  
During Reset, all I/O Registers are then set to their initial values and the program starts  
execution from address $000. The instruction placed in address $000 must be a JMP  
(relative jump) instruction to the reset handling routine. If the program never enables an  
interrupt source, the Interrupt Vectors are not used and regular program code can be  
placed at these locations. The circuit diagram in Figure 24 shows the Reset Logic. Table  
3 and Table 4 define the timing and electrical parameters of the reset circuitry.  
Figure 24. Reset Logic  
DATA BUS  
MCU Status  
Register (MCUSR)  
CKSEL[2:0]  
Delay Counters  
Full  
CK  
25  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Table 3. Reset Characteristics (VCC = 5.0V)(1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min Typ  
Max  
1.8  
Units  
VPOT  
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (rising)  
Power-on Reset Threshold Voltage (falling)(1)  
RESET Pin Threshold Voltage  
1.0  
0.4  
1.4  
0.6  
V
V
V
0.8  
VRST  
0.85 VCC  
Note:  
1. The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOT  
(falling).  
Table 4. Reset Delay Selections(3)  
CKSEL Start-up Time, VCC = 2.7V,  
Start-up Time, VCC = 4.0V, Recommended  
SUT Programmed  
[2:0]  
SUT Unprogrammed  
Usage(1)  
000  
4.2 ms + 6 CK  
5.8 ms + 6 CK  
External Clock, Fast  
Rising Power  
001  
010  
30 µs + 6 CK  
10 µs + 6 CK  
External Clock(2)  
67 ms + 16K CK  
92 ms + 16K CK  
Crystal Oscillator,  
Slowly Rising Power  
011  
4.2 ms + 16K CK  
5.8 ms + 16K CK  
Crystal Oscillator,  
Fast Rising Power  
100  
101  
30 µs + 16K CK  
67 ms + 1K CK  
10 µs + 16K CK  
92 ms + 1K CK  
Crystal Oscillator(2)  
Ceramic  
Resonator/External  
Clock, Slowly Rising  
Power  
110  
111  
4.2 ms + 1K CK  
30 µs + 1K CK  
5.8 ms + 1K CK  
10 µs + 1K CK  
Ceramic Resonator,  
Fast Rising Power  
Ceramic  
Resonator(2)  
Notes: 1. The CKSEL fuses control only the start-up time. The Oscillator is the same for all  
selections. On Power-up, the real-time part of the start-up time is increased with typ.  
0.6 ms.  
2. External Power-on Reset.  
3. Table 4 shows the Start-up Times from Reset. From sleep, only the clock counting  
part of the start-up time is used. The Watchdog Oscillator is used for timing the real-  
time part of the start-up time. The number WDT Oscillator cycles used for each time-  
out is shown in Table 5.  
Table 5. Number of Watchdog Oscillator Cycles  
SUT  
Time-out  
Number of Cycles  
Unprogrammed  
Unprogrammed  
Programmed  
Programmed  
4.2 ms (at VCC = 2.7V)  
67 ms (at VCC = 2.7V)  
5.8 ms (at VCC = 4.0V)  
92 ms (at VCC = 4.0V)  
1K  
16K  
4K  
64K  
The frequency of the Watchdog Oscillator is voltage-dependent as shown in the Electri-  
cal Characteristics section. The device is shipped with CKSEL = 010.  
26  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Power-on Reset  
A Power-on Reset (POR) pulse is generated by an On-chip detection circuit. The detec-  
tion level is nominally 1.4V (rising VCC). The POR is activated whenever VCC is below  
the detection level. The POR circuit can be used to trigger the Start-up Reset, as well as  
detect a failure in supply voltage.  
A Power-on Reset (POR) circuit ensures that the device is reset from Power-on. Reach-  
ing the Power-on Reset threshold voltage invokes a delay counter, which determines  
the delay, for which the device is kept in RESET after VCC rise. The time-out period of  
the delay counter can be defined by the user through the CKSEL fuses. The eight differ-  
ent selections for the delay period are presented in Table 4. The RESET signal is  
activated again, without any delay, when the VCC decreases below detection level.  
Figure 25. MCU Start-up, RESET Tied to VCC  
VPOT  
VCC  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
Figure 26. MCU Start-up, RESET Controlled Externally  
VPOT  
VCC  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
27  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
External Reset  
An External Reset is generated by a low level on the RESET pin. Reset pulses longer  
than 500 ns will generate a Reset, even if the clock is not running. Shorter pulses are  
not guaranteed to generate a Reset. When the applied signal reaches the Reset  
Threshold Voltage (VRST) on its positive edge, the delay timer starts the MCU after the  
Time-out period (tTOUT) has expired.  
Figure 27. External Reset during Operation  
Watchdog Reset  
When the Watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of 1 XTAL cycle dura-  
tion. On the falling edge of this pulse, the delay timer starts counting the Time-out period  
(tTOUT). Refer to page 58 for details on operation of the Watchdog.  
Figure 28. Watchdog Reset during Operation  
28  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
MCU Status Register –  
MCUSR  
The MCU Status Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU  
Reset.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$34 ($54)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
WDRF  
R/W  
EXTRF  
R/W  
PORF  
R/W  
MCUSR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
See Bit Description  
• Bits 7..4 Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 WDRF: Watchdog Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a Watchdog Reset occurs. The bit is cleared by a Power-on Reset or by  
writing a logical “0” to the Flag.  
• Bit 2 Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit are reserved bit in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
• Bit 1 EXTRF: External Reset Flag  
This bit is set if an External Reset occurs. The bit is cleared by a Power-on Reset or by  
writing a logical “0” to the Flag.  
• Bit 0 PORF: Power-on Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a Power-on Reset occurs. The bit is cleared only by writing a logical “0”  
to the Flag.  
To make use of the Reset Flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read and  
then clear the MCUSR as early as possible in the program. If the register is cleared  
before another reset occurs, the source of the reset can be found by examining the  
Reset Flags.  
Interrupt Handling  
The ATmega161 has two 8-bit Interrupt Mask Control Registers; GIMSK (General Inter-  
rupt Mask Register) and TIMSK (Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register).  
When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared (zero) and all inter-  
rupts are disabled. The user software can set (one) the I-bit to enable nested interrupts.  
The I-bit is set (one) when a Return from Interrupt instruction (RETI) is executed.  
When the Program Counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt Vector in order to execute  
the interrupt handling routine, hardware clears the corresponding flag that generated the  
interrupt. Some of the Interrupt Flags can also be cleared by writing a logical “1” to the  
Flag bit position(s) to be cleared.  
If an interrupt condition occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is cleared  
(zero), the Interrupt Flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled or the  
Flag is cleared by software.  
If one or more interrupt conditions occur when the global interrupt enable bit is cleared  
(zero), the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the global  
interrupt enable bit is set (one), and will be executed by order of priority.  
Note that external level interrupt does not have a flag and will only be remembered for  
as long as the interrupt condition is present.  
29  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt rou-  
tine or restored when returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by  
software.  
Interrupt Response Time  
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is four clock cycles  
minimum. After four clock cycles, the Program Vector address for the actual interrupt  
handling routine is executed. During this four-clock-cycle period, the Program Counter  
(13 bits) is pushed onto the Stack. The Vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine,  
and this jump takes three clock cycles. If an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-  
cycle instruction, this instruction is completed before the interrupt is served. If an inter-  
rupt occurs when the MCU is in Sleep mode, the interrupt execution response time is  
increased by four clock cycles.  
A return from an interrupt handling routine takes four clock cycles. During these four  
clock cycles, the Program Counter (2 bytes) is popped back from the Stack, the Stack  
Pointer is incremented by 2, and the I-Flag in SREG is set. When AVR exits from an  
interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one more instruction  
before any pending interrupt is served.  
General Interrupt Mask  
Register – GIMSK  
Bit  
7
6
5
INT2  
R
4
3
2
1
0
$3B ($5B)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
INT1  
R/W  
0
INT0  
R/W  
0
GIMSK  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
• Bit 7 INT1: External Interrupt Request 1 Enable  
When the INT1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one),  
the external pin interrupt is enabled. The Interrupt Sense Control1 bits 1/0 (ISC11 and  
ISC10) in the MCU general Control Register (MCUCR) define whether the external  
interrupt is activated on rising and/or falling edge of the INT1 pin or is level-sensed.  
Activity on the pin will cause an interrupt request even if INT1 is configured as an output.  
The corresponding interrupt of External Interrupt Request 1 is executed from Program  
memory address $004. See also “External Interrupts”.  
• Bit 6 INT0: External Interrupt Request 0 Enable  
When the INT0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one),  
the external pin interrupt is enabled. The Interrupt Sense Control0 bits 1/0 (ISC01 and  
ISC00) in the MCU general Control Register (MCUCR) define whether the external  
interrupt is activated on rising and/or falling edge of the INT0 pin or is level-sensed.  
Activity on the pin will cause an interrupt request even if INT0 is configured as an output.  
The corresponding interrupt of External Interrupt Request 0 is executed from Program  
memory address $002. See also “External Interrupts.”  
• Bit 5 – INT2: External Interrupt Request 2 Enable  
When the INT2 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one),  
the external pin interrupt is activated. The Interrupt Sense Control2 bit (ISC02 in the  
Extended MCU Control Register [EMCUCR]) defines whether the external interrupt is  
activated on rising or falling edge of the INT2 pin. Activity on the pin will cause an inter-  
rupt request even if INT2 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of  
External Interrupt Request 2 is executed from Program memory address $006. See also  
“External Interrupts.”  
30  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
• Bits 4..0 Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
General Interrupt Flag  
Register – GIFR  
Bit  
7
INTF1  
R/W  
0
6
INTF0  
R/W  
0
5
INTF2  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
1
0
$3A ($5A)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
GIFR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 INTF1: External Interrupt Flag1  
When an event on the INT1 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF1 becomes set (one).  
If the I-bit in SREG and the INT1 bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the  
Interrupt Vector at address $004. The Flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is exe-  
cuted. Alternatively, the Flag can be cleared by writing a logical “1” to it.  
• Bit 6 INTF0: External Interrupt Flag0  
When an event on the INT0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF0 becomes set (one).  
If the I-bit in SREG and the INT0 bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the  
Interrupt Vector at address $002. The Flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is exe-  
cuted. Alternatively, the Flag can be cleared by writing a logical “1” to it.  
• Bit 5 INTF2: External Interrupt Flag2  
When an event on the INT2 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF2 becomes set (one).  
If the I-bit in SREG and the INT2 bit in GIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the  
Interrupt Vector at address $006. The Flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is exe-  
cuted. Alternatively, the Flag can be cleared by writing a logical “1” to it.  
• Bits 4..0 Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask  
Register – TIMSK  
Bit  
7
TOIE1  
R/W  
0
6
OCIE1A  
R/W  
0
5
OCIE1B  
R/W  
0
4
TOIE2  
R/W  
0
3
TICIE1  
R/W  
0
2
OCIE2  
R/W  
0
1
TOIE0  
R/W  
0
0
OCIE0  
R/W  
0
$39 ($59)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
TIMSK  
• Bit 7 TOIE1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When the TOIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at Vector  
$012) is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter1 occurs, i.e., when the TOV1 bit is set  
in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR).  
• Bit 6 OCE1A: Timer/Counter1 Output CompareA Match Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE1A bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 CompareA Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at  
Vector $00e) is executed if a Compare A Match in Timer/Counter1 occurs, i.e., when the  
OCF1A bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR).  
31  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
• Bit 5 OCIE1B: Timer/Counter1 Output CompareB Match Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE1B bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 CompareB Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at  
Vector $010) is executed if a Compare B Match in Timer/Counter1 occurs, i.e., when the  
OCF1B bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR).  
• Bit 4 TOIE2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When the TOIE2 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at Vector  
$00a) is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the TOV2 bit is set  
in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR).  
• Bit 3 TICIE1: Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Interrupt Enable  
When the TICIE1 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Event Interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt  
(at Vector $00C) is executed if a capture-triggering event occurs on pin 31, ICP, i.e.,  
when the ICF1 bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR).  
• Bit 2 OCIE2: Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Match Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE2 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter2 Compare Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at  
Vector $008) is executed if a Compare2 match in Timer/Counter2 occurs, i.e., when the  
OCF2 bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR).  
• Bit 1 TOIE0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When the TOIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at Vector  
$016) is executed if an overflow in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the TOV0 bit is set  
in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR).  
• Bit 0 OCIE0: Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Match Interrupt Enable  
When the OCIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding interrupt (at  
Vector $014) is executed if a Compare 0 Match in Timer/Counter0 occurs, i.e., when the  
OCF0 bit is set in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR).  
32  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag  
Register – TIFR  
Bit  
7
TOV1  
R/W  
0
6
OCF1A  
R/W  
0
5
OCIFB  
R/W  
0
4
TOV2  
R/W  
0
3
2
OCF2  
R/W  
0
1
TOV0  
R/W  
0
0
OCF0  
R/W  
0
$38 ($58)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
ICF1  
R/W  
0
TIFR  
• Bit 7 TOV1: Timer/Counter1 Overflow Flag  
The TOV1 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter1. TOV1 is cleared by  
hardware when executing the corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector. Alternatively,  
TOV1 is cleared by writing a logical “1” to the Flag. When the I-bit in SREG, and TOIE1  
(Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt Enable), and TOV1 are set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 Overflow Interrupt is executed. In PWM mode, this bit is set when  
Timer/Counter1 changes counting direction at $0000.  
• Bit 6 OCF1A: Output Compare Flag 1A  
The OCF1A bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter1  
and the data in OCR1A (Output Compare Register 1A). OCF1A is cleared by hardware  
when executing the corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector. Alternatively, OCF1A is  
cleared by writing a logical “1” to the Flag. When the I-bit in SREG and OCIE1A  
(Timer/Counter1 Compare Match Interrupt A Enable) and OCF1A are set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 Compare A Match Interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 5 OCF1B: Output Compare Flag 1B  
The OCF1B bit is set (one) when a compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter1  
and the data in OCR1B (Output Compare Register 1B). OCF1B is cleared by hardware  
when executing the corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector. Alternatively, OCF1B is  
cleared by writing a logical “1” to the Flag. When the I-bit in SREG and OCIE1B  
(Timer/Counter1 Compare Match Interrupt B Enable) and OCF1B are set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 Compare B Match Interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 4 TOV2: Timer/Counter2 Overflow Flag  
The bit TOV2 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter2. TOV2 is cleared  
by hardware when executing the corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector. Alternatively,  
TOV2 is cleared by writing a logical “1” to the Flag. When the SREG I-bit and TOIE2  
(Timer/Counter2 Overflow Interrupt Enable) and TOV2 are set (one), the  
Timer/Counter2 Overflow interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 3 ICF1: Input Capture Flag 1  
The ICF1 bit is set (one) to flag an Input Capture Event, indicating that the  
Timer/Counter1 value has been transferred to the Input Capture Register (ICR1). ICF1  
is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector.  
Alternatively, ICF1 is cleared by writing a logical “1” to the Flag. When the SREG I-bit  
and TICIE1 (Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Interrupt Enable) and ICF1 are set (one), the  
Timer/Counter1 Capture Interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 2 OCF2: Output Compare Flag 2  
The OCF2 bit is set (one) when a Compare Match occurs between the Timer/Counter2  
and the data in OCR2 (Output Compare Register 2). OCF2 is cleared by hardware when  
executing the corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector. Alternatively, OCF2 is cleared  
by writing a logical “1” to the Flag. When the I-bit in SREG and OCIE2 (Timer/Counter2  
33  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Compare match InterruptA Enable) and the OCF2 are set (one), the Timer/Counter2  
Compare match Interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 1 TOV0: Timer/Counter0 Overflow Flag  
The bit TOV0 is set (one) when an overflow occurs in Timer/Counter0. TOV0 is cleared  
by hardware when executing the corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector. Alternatively,  
TOV0 is cleared by writing a logical “1” to the Flag. When the SREG I-bit and TOIE0  
(Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Enable) and TOV0 are set (one), the  
Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is executed.  
• Bit 2 OCF0: Output Compare Flag 0  
The OCF0 bit is set (one) when compare match occurs between the Timer/Counter0  
and the data in OCR0 (Output Compare Register 0). OCF0 is cleared by hardware when  
executing the corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector. Alternatively, OCF0 is cleared  
by writing a logical “1” to the Flag. When the I-bit in SREG and OCIE0 (Timer/Counter0  
Compare match InterruptA Enable) and the OCF0 are set (one), the Timer/Counter0  
Compare match Interrupt is executed.  
External Interrupts  
The external interrupts are triggered by the INT0, INT1, and INT2 pins. Observe that, if  
enabled, the interrupts will trigger even if the INT0/INT1/INT2 pins are configured as out-  
puts. This feature provides a way of generating a software interrupt. The external  
interrupts can be triggered by a falling or rising edge or a low level (INT2 is only an edge  
triggered interrupt). This is set up as indicated in the specification for the MCU Control  
Register – MCUCR (INT0/INT1) and EMCUCR (INT2). When the external interrupt is  
enabled and is configured as level triggered (only INT0/INT1), the interrupt will trigger as  
long as the pin is held low.  
MCU Control Register –  
MCUCR  
The MCU Control Register contains control bits for general MCU functions.  
Bit  
7
6
SRW10  
R/W  
0
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
ISC11  
R/W  
0
2
ISC10  
R/W  
0
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
$35 ($55)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
SRE  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
• Bit 7 SRE: External SRAM Enable  
When the SRE bit is set (one), the external Data memory interface is enabled and the  
pin functions AD0 - 7 (Port A), A8 - 5 (Port C), ALE (Port E), WR, and RD (Port D) are  
activated as the alternate pin functions. The SRE bit overrides any pin direction settings  
in the respective Data Direction Registers. See Figure 50 through Figure 53 for a  
description of the external memory pin functions. When the SRE bit is cleared (zero),  
the external Data memory interface is disabled and the normal pin and data direction  
settings are used.  
• Bit 6 SRW10: External SRAM Wait State  
The SRW10 bit is used to set up extra wait states in the external memory interface. See  
“Double-speed Transmission” on page 78 for a detailed description.  
• Bit 5 SE: Sleep Enable  
The SE bit must be set (one) to make the MCU enter the Sleep mode when the SLEEP  
instruction is executed. To avoid the MCU entering the Sleep mode unless it is the pro-  
34  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
grammer’s purpose, it is recommended to set the Sleep Enable (SE) bit just before the  
execution of the SLEEP instruction.  
• Bit 4 SM1: Sleep Mode Select Bit 1  
The SM1 bit, together with the SM0 control bit in EMCUCR, selects between the three  
available Sleep modes as shown in Table 6.  
Table 6. Sleep Mode Select  
SM1  
SM0  
Sleep Mode  
Idle  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Reserved  
Power-down  
Power-save  
• Bits 3, 2 ISC11, ISC10: Interrupt Sense Control 1 Bit 1 and Bit 0  
The External Interrupt 1 is activated by the external pin INT1 if the SREG I-Flag and the  
corresponding interrupt mask in the GIMSK are set. The level and edges on the external  
INT1 pin that activate the interrupt are defined in Table 7. The value on the INT1 pin is  
sampled before detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last  
longer than one clock period will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaran-  
teed to generate an interrupt. If low-level interrupt is selected, the low level must be held  
until the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an interrupt.  
Table 7. Interrupt 1 Sense Control  
ISC11  
ISC10  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The low level of INT1 generates an interrupt request.  
Any logical change on INT1 generates an interrupt request.  
The falling edge of INT1 generates an interrupt request.  
The rising edge of INT1 generates an interrupt request.  
• Bits 1, 0 ISC01, ISC00: Interrupt Sense Control 0 Bit 1 and Bit 0  
The External Interrupt 0 is activated by the external pin INT0 if the SREG I-Flag and the  
corresponding interrupt mask is set. The level and edges on the external INT0 pin that  
activate the interrupt are defined in Table 8. The value on the INT0 pin is sampled  
before detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last longer  
than one clock period will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to  
generate an interrupt. If low-level interrupt is selected, the low level must be held until  
the completion of the currently executing instruction to generate an interrupt.  
Table 8. Interrupt 0 Sense Control  
ISC01  
ISC00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The low level of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
Any logical change on INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
The falling edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
The rising edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
35  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Extended MCU Control  
Register – EMCUCR  
The Extended MCU Control Register contains control bits for External Interrupt 2, Sleep  
mode bit and control bits for the external memory interface.  
Bit  
7
6
SRL2  
R/W  
0
5
SRL1  
R/W  
0
4
SRL0  
R/W  
0
3
SRW01  
R/W  
0
2
SRW00  
R/W  
0
1
SRW11  
R/W  
0
0
$36 ($56)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
SM0  
R/W  
0
ISC2  
R/W  
0
EMCUCR  
• Bit 7 SM0: Sleep Mode Bit 0  
When this bit is set (one) and Sleep mode bit 1 (SM1) in MCUCR is set, Power-save  
mode is selected as Sleep mode. Refer to page 36 for a detailed description of the  
Sleep modes.  
• Bits 6..4 SRL2, SRL1, SRL0: External SRAM Limit  
It is possible to configure different wait states for different external memory addresses in  
ATmega161. The SRL2 - SRL0 bits are used to define at which address the different  
wait states will be configured. See “Interface to External Memory” on page 84 for a  
detailed description.  
• Bits 3..1 SRW01, SRW00, SRW11: External SRAM Wait State Select Bits  
The SRW01, SRW00 and SRW11 bits are used to set up extra wait states in the exter-  
nal memory interface. See “Interface to External Memory” on page 84 for a detailed  
description.  
• Bit 0 ISC2: Interrupt Sense Control 2  
The external interrupt 2 is activated by the external pin INT2 if the SREG I-Flag and the  
corresponding interrupt mask in the GIMSK are set. If ISC2 is cleared (zero), a falling  
edge on INT2 activates the interrupt. If ISC2 is set (one), a rising edge on INT2 activates  
the interrupt. Edges on INT2 are registered asynchronously. Pulses on INT2 wider than  
50 ns will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an  
interrupt.  
When changing the ISC2 bit, an interrupt can occur. Therefore, it is recommended to  
first disable INT2 by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the GIMSK Register. Then, ISC2  
bit can be changed. Finally, the INT2 Interrupt Flag should be cleared by writing a logical  
“1” to its Interrupt Flag bit in the GIFR Register before the interrupt is re-enabled.  
Sleep Modes  
To enter any of the three Sleep modes, the SE bit in MCUCR must be set (one) and a  
SLEEP instruction must be executed. The SM1 bit in the MCUCR Register and SM0 bit  
in the EMCUCR Register select which Sleep mode (Idle, Power-down or Power-save)  
will be activated by the SLEEP instruction (see Table 6). If an enabled interrupt occurs  
while the MCU is in a Sleep mode, the MCU awakes. The CPU is then halted for four  
cycles, it executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruction fol-  
lowing SLEEP. The contents of the Register File, SRAM and I/O memory are unaltered.  
If a reset occurs during Sleep mode, the MCU wakes up and executes from the Reset  
Vector.  
Idle Mode  
When the SM1/SM0 bits are set to 00, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter the  
Idle mode, stopping the CPU but allowing SPI, UARTs, Analog Comparator,  
Timer/Counters, Watchdog, and the Interrupt System to continue operating. This  
enables the MCU to wake up from external triggered interrupts as well as internal ones  
like the Timer Overflow and UART Receive Complete interrupts. If wake-up from the  
36  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Analog Comparator interrupt is not required, the Analog Comparator can be powered  
down by setting the ACD bit in the Analog Comparator Control and Status Register  
(ACSR). This will reduce power consumption in Idle mode.  
Power-down Mode  
When the SM1/SM0 bits are set to 10, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter the  
Power-down mode. In this mode, the external Oscillator is stopped while the external  
interrupts and the Watchdog (if enabled) continue operating. Only an External Reset, a  
Watchdog Reset (if enabled), an external level interrupt on INT0 or INT1, or an external  
edge interrupt on INT2 can wake up the MCU.  
If INT2 is used for wake-up from Power-down mode, the edge is remembered until the  
MCU wakes up.  
If a level-triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down mode, the changed  
level must be held for some time to wake up the MCU. This makes the MCU less sensi-  
tive to noise. The changed level is sampled twice by the Watchdog Oscillator clock, and  
if the input has the required level during this time, the MCU will wake up. The period of  
the Watchdog Oscillator is 1 µs (nominal) at 5.0V and 25°C. The frequency of the  
Watchdog Oscillator is voltage-dependent as shown in the Electrical Characteristics  
section.  
When waking up from Power-down mode, a delay from the wake-up condition occurs  
until the wake-up becomes effective. This allows the clock to restart and become stable  
after having been stopped. The wake-up period is defined by the same CKSEL fuses  
that define the Reset Time-out period. The wake-up period is equal to the clock counting  
part of the reset period, as shown in Table 4. If the wake-up condition disappears before  
the MCU wakes up and starts to execute, e.g., a low level on INT0 is not held long  
enough, the interrupt causing the wake-up will not be executed.  
Power-save Mode  
When the SM1/SM0 bits are 11, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter the  
Power-save mode. This mode is identical to Power-down, with one exception.  
If Timer/Counter2 is clocked asynchronously, i.e., the AS2 bit in ASSR is set,  
Timer/Counter2 will run during sleep. In addition to the Power-down wake-up sources,  
the device can also wake up from either Timer Overflow or Output Compare event from  
Timer/Counter2 if the corresponding Timer/Counter2 interrupt enable bits are set in  
TIMSK and the global interrupt enable bit in SREG is set.  
If the asynchronous timer is not clocked asynchronously, Power-down mode is recom-  
mended instead of Power-save mode because the contents of the register in the  
asynchronous timer should be considered undefined after wake-up in Power-save mode  
even if AS2 is 0.  
37  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Timer/Counters  
The ATmega161 provides three general purpose Timer/Counters – two 8-bit T/Cs and  
one 16-bit T/C. Timer/Counter2 can optionally be asynchronously clocked from an exter-  
nal Oscillator. This Oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768 kHz watch crystal,  
enabling use of Timer/Counter2 as a Real-time Clock (RTC). Timer/Counters 0 and 1  
have individual prescaling selection from the same 10-bit prescaling timer.  
Timer/Counter2 has its own prescaler. Both these prescalers can be Reset by setting  
the corresponding control bits in the Special Functions IO Register (SFIOR). Refer to  
page 39 for a detailed description. These Timer/Counters can either be used as a timer  
with an internal clock time base or as a counter with an external pin connection, which  
triggers the counting.  
Timer/Counter  
Prescalers  
Figure 29. Prescaler for Timer/Counter0 and 1  
Clear  
PSR10  
TCK1  
TCK0  
For Timer/Counters 0 and 1, the four prescaled selections are: CK/8, CK/64, CK/256,  
and CK/1024, where CK is the Oscillator clock. For the two Timer/Counters 0 and 1, CK,  
external source and stop can also be selected as clock sources. Setting the PSR10 bit  
in SFIOR Resets the prescaler. This allows the user to operate with a predictable pres-  
caler. Note that Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 share the same prescaler and a  
Prescaler Reset will affect both Timer/Counters.  
38  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 30. Timer/Counter2 Prescaler  
CK  
PCK2  
10-BIT T/C PRESCALER  
Clear  
TOSC1  
AS2  
PSR2  
0
CS20  
CS21  
CS22  
TIMER/COUNTER2 CLOCK SOURCE  
TCK2  
The clock source for Timer/Counter2 prescaler is named PCK2. PCK2 is by default con-  
nected to the main system clock (CK). By setting the AS2 bit in ASSR, Timer/Counter2  
is asynchronously clocked from the PD4(TOSC1) pin. This enables use of  
Timer/Counter2 as a Real-time Clock (RTC). When AS2 is set, pins PD4(TOSC1) and  
PD5(TOSC2) are disconnected from Port D. A crystal can then be connected between  
the PD4(TOSC1) and PD5(TOSC2) pins to serve as an independent clock source for  
Timer/Counter2. The Oscillator is optimized for use with a 32.768 kHz crystal. Alterna-  
tively, an external clock signal can be applied to PD4(TOSC1). The frequency of this  
clock must be lower than one fourth of the CPU clock and not higher than 256 kHz. Set-  
ting the PSR2 bit in SFIOR Resets the prescaler. This allows the user to operate with a  
predictable prescaler.  
Special Function IO Register –  
SFIOR  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PSR2  
R/W  
0
0
PSR10  
R/W  
0
$30 ($50)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
SFIOR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7..2 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
• Bit 1 PSR2: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter2  
When this bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter2 prescaler will be reset. The bit will be  
cleared by hardware after the operation is performed. Writing a zero to this bit will have  
no effect. This bit will always be read as zero if Timer/Counter2 is clocked by the internal  
CPU clock. If this bit is written when Timer/Counter2 is operating in asynchronous  
mode, however, the bit will remain as one until the prescaler has been reset. See “Asyn-  
chronous Operation of Timer/Counter2” on page 48 for a detailed description of  
asynchronous operation.  
39  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
• Bit 0 PSR10: Prescaler Reset Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0  
When this bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 prescaler will be  
reset. The bit will be cleared by hardware after the operation is performed. Writing a  
zero to this bit will have no effect. Note that Timer/Counter1 and Timer/Counter0 share  
the same prescaler and a reset of this prescaler will affect both timers. This bit will  
always be read as zero.  
8-bit Timer/Counters  
T/C0 and T/C2  
Figure 31 shows the block diagram for Timer/Counter0. Figure 32 shows the block dia-  
gram for Timer/Counter2.  
Figure 31. Timer/Counter0 Block Diagram  
T/C0 OVER- T/C0 COMPARE  
FLOW IRQ  
MATCH IRQ  
TIMER INT. MASK  
REGISTER (TIMSK)  
TIMER INT. FLAG  
REGISTER (TIFR)  
T/C0 CONTROL  
REGISTER (TCCR0)  
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS  
IO REGISTER (SFIOR)  
7
7
7
0
0
0
T/C CLEAR  
TIMER/COUNTER0  
(TCNT0)  
T/C CLK SOURCE  
UP/DOWN  
CK  
T0  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
8-BIT COMPARATOR  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
REGISTER0 (OCR0)  
40  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 32. Timer/Counter2 Block Diagram  
T/C2 OVER- T/C2 COMPARE  
FLOW IRQ  
MATCH IRQ  
8-BIT DATA BUS  
8-BIT ASYNCH T/C2 DATA BUS  
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS  
IO REGISTER (SFIOR)  
T/C2 CONTROL  
REGISTER (TCCR2)  
TIMER INT. MASK  
REGISTER (TIMSK)  
TIMER INT. FLAG  
REGISTER (TIFR)  
7
7
7
0
0
0
T/C CLEAR  
TIMER/COUNTER2  
(TCNT2)  
T/C CLK SOURCE  
UP/DOWN  
CK  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
TOSC1  
8-BIT COMPARATOR  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
REGISTER2 (OCR2)  
ASYNCH. STATUS  
REGISTER (ASSR)  
CK  
TCK2  
SYNCH UNIT  
The 8-bit Timer/Counter0 can select clock source from CK, prescaled CK or an external  
pin.The 8-bit Timer/Counter2 can select clock source from CK, prescaled CK or external  
TOSC1.  
Both Timer/Counters can be stopped as described in sections “Timer/Counter0 Control  
Register TCCR0” and “Timer/Counter2 Control Register TCCR2”.  
The various Status Flags (Overflow and Compare Match) are found in the  
Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR). Control signals are found in the  
Timer/Counter Control Register (TCCR0 and TCCR2). The interrupt enable/disable set-  
tings are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK).  
When Timer/Counter0 is externally clocked, the external signal is synchronized with the  
Oscillator frequency of the CPU. To assure proper sampling of the external clock, the  
minimum time between two external clock transitions must be at least one internal CPU  
clock period. The external clock signal is sampled on the rising edge of the internal CPU  
clock.  
The 8-bit Timer/Counters feature both a high resolution and a high accuracy usage with  
the lower prescaling opportunities. Similarly, the high prescaling opportunities make the  
Timer/Counter0 useful for lower speed functions or exact timing functions with infre-  
quent actions.  
Timer/Counters 0 and 2 can also be used as 8-bit Pulse Width Modulators. In this  
mode, the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare Register serve as a glitch-free,  
stand-alone PWM with centered pulses. Refer to page 44 for a detailed description of  
this function.  
41  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Timer/Counter0 Control  
Register – TCCR0  
Bit  
7
FOC0  
R/W  
0
6
PWM0  
R/W  
0
5
COM01  
R/W  
0
4
COM00  
R/W  
0
3
CTC0  
R/W  
0
2
CS02  
R/W  
0
1
CS01  
R/W  
0
0
CS00  
R/W  
0
$33 ($53)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
TCCR0  
TCCR2  
Timer/Counter2 Control  
Register – TCCR2  
Bit  
7
FOC2  
R/W  
0
6
PWM2  
R/W  
0
5
COM21  
R/W  
0
4
COM20  
R/W  
0
3
CTC2  
R/W  
0
2
CS22  
R/W  
0
1
CS21  
R/W  
0
0
CS20  
R/W  
0
$27 ($47)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
• Bit 7 FOC0/FOC2: Force Output Compare  
Writing a logical “1” to this bit forces a change in the compare match output pin PB0  
(Timer/Counter0) and PB1 (Timer/Counter2) according to the values already set in  
COMn1 and COMn0. If the COMn1 and COMn0 bits are written in the same cycle as  
FOC0/FOC2, the new settings will not take effect until the next compare match or  
Forced Output Compare Match occurs. The Force Output Compare bit can be used to  
change the output pin without waiting for a compare match in the timer. The automatic  
action programmed in COMn1 and COMn0 happens as if a Compare Match had  
occurred, but no interrupt is generated and the Timer/Counters will not be cleared even  
if CTC0/CTC2 is set. The FOC0/FOC2 bits will always be read as zero. The setting of  
the FOC0/FOC2 bits has no effect in PWM mode.  
• Bit 6 PWM0/PWM2: Pulse Width Modulator Enable  
When set (one), this bit enables PWM mode for Timer/Counter0 or Timer/Counter2.  
This mode is described on page 44.  
• Bits 5, 4 COM01, COM00/COM21, COM20: Compare Output Mode, Bits 1 and 0  
The COMn1 and COMn0 control bits determine any output pin action following a com-  
pare match in Timer/Counter0 or Timer/Counter2. Output pin actions affect pins  
PB0(OC0) or PB1(OC2). This is an alternative function to an I/O port and the corre-  
sponding direction control bit must be set (one) to control an output pin. The control  
configuration is shown in Table 9.  
Table 9. Compare Mode Select(1)(2)  
COMn1  
COMn0  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Timer/Counter disconnected from output pin OCn.  
Toggle the OCn output line.  
Clear the OCn output line (to zero).  
Set the OCn output line (to one).  
Notes: 1. In PWM mode, these bits have a different function. Refer to Table 12 for a detailed  
description.  
2. n = 0 or 2  
• Bit 3 CTC0/CTC2: Clear Timer/Counter on Compare Match  
When the CTC0 or CTC2 control bit is set (one), Timer/Counter0 or Timer/Counter2 is  
reset to $00 in the CPU clock cycle after a compare match. If the control bit is cleared,  
the Timer/Counter continues counting and is unaffected by a compare match. When a  
42  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
prescaling of 1 is used, and the compare register is set to C, the timer will count as fol-  
lows if CTC0/CTC2 is set:  
... | C-1 | C | 0 | 1 | ...  
When the prescaler is set to divide by 8, the timer will count like this:  
... | C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1 | C, C, C, C, C, C, C, C | 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 |  
1, 1, 1, ...  
In PWM mode, this bit has a different function. If the CTC0 or CTC2 bit is cleared in  
PWM mode, the Timer/Counter acts as an up/down counter. If the CTC0 or CTC2 bit is  
set (one), the Timer/Counter wraps when it reaches $FF. Refer to page 44 for a detailed  
description.  
• Bits 2, 1, 0 CS02, CS01, CS00/CS22, CS21, CS20: Clock Select Bits 2, 1 and 0  
The Clock Select bits 2, 1, and 0 define the prescaling source of Timer/Counter0 and  
Timer/Counter2.  
Table 10. Clock 0 Prescale Select  
CS02  
CS01  
CS00  
Description  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Stop, the Timer/Counter0 is stopped.  
CK  
CK/8  
CK/64  
CK/256  
CK/1024  
External Pin PB0(T0), falling edge  
External Pin PB0(T0), rising edge  
Table 11. Clock 2 Prescale Select  
CS22  
CS21  
CS20  
Description  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Stop, the Timer/Counter2 is stopped.  
PCK2  
PCK2/8  
PCK2/32  
PCK2/64  
PCK2/128  
PCK2/256  
PCK2/1024  
The Stop condition provides a Timer Enable/Disable function. The prescaled modes are  
scaled directly from the CK Oscillator clock for Timer/Counter0 and PCK2 for  
Timer/Counter2. If the external pin modes are used for Timer/Counter0, transitions on  
PB0/(T0) will clock the counter even if the pin is configured as an output. This feature  
can give the user software control of the counting.  
43  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Timer Counter0 – TCNT0  
Timer/Counter2 – TCNT2  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$32 ($52)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
TCNT0  
TCNT2  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$23 ($43)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
These 8-bit registers contain the value of the Timer/Counters.  
Both Timer/Counters are realized as up or up/down (in PWM mode) counters with read  
and write access. If the Timer/Counter is written to and a clock source is selected, it con-  
tinues counting in the timer clock cycle following the write operation.  
Timer/Counter0 Output  
Compare Register – OCR0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$31 ($51)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
MSB  
R/W  
0
LSB  
R/W  
0
OCR0  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
Timer/Counter2 Output  
Compare Register – OCR2  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$22 ($42)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
OCR2  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The Output Compare Registers are 8-bit read/write registers. The Timer/Counter Output  
Compare Registers contain the data to be continuously compared with the  
Timer/Counter. Actions on compare matches are specified in TCCR0 and TCCR2. A  
software write to the Timer/Counter Register blocks compare matches in the next  
Timer/Counter clock cycle. This prevents immediate interrupts when initializing the  
Timer/Counter.  
A compare match will set the Compare Interrupt Flag in the CPU clock cycle following  
the compare event.  
Timer/Counters 0 and 2 in  
PWM Mode  
When PWM mode is selected, the Timer/Counter either wraps (overflows) when it  
reaches $FF or it acts as an up/down counter.  
If the up/down mode is selected, the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare Registers  
(OCR0 or OCR2) form an 8-bit, free-running, glitch-free and phase-correct PWM with  
outputs on the PB0(OC0/PWM0) or PB1(OC2/PWM2) pin.  
If the Overflow mode is selected, the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare Registers  
(OCR0 or OCR2) form an 8-bit, free-running and glitch-free PWM, operating with twice  
the speed of the up/down counting mode.  
44  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
PWM Modes (Up/Down and  
Overflow)  
The two different PWM modes are selected by the CTC0 or CTC2 bit in the  
Timer/Counter Control Registers – TCCR0 or TCCR2, respectively.  
If CTC0/CTC2 is cleared and PWM mode is selected, the Timer/Counter acts as an  
up/down counter, counting up from $00 to $FF, where it turns and counts down again to  
zero before the cycle is repeated. When the counter value matches the contents of the  
Output Compare Register, the PB0(OC0/PWM0) or PB1(OC2/PWM2) pin is set or  
cleared according to the settings of the COMn1/COMn0 bits in the Timer/Counter Con-  
trol Registers TCCR0 or TCCR2.  
If CTC0/CTC2 is set and PWM mode is selected, the Timer/Counters will wrap and start  
counting from $00 after reaching $FF. The PB0(OC0/PWM0) or PB1(OC2/PWM2) pin  
will be set or cleared according to the settings of COMn1/COMn0 on a Timer/Counter  
overflow or when the counter value matches the contents of the Output Compare Regis-  
ter. Refer to Table 12 for details.  
Table 12. Compare Mode Select in PWM Mode(1)  
CTCn COMn1 COMn0 Effect on Compare Pin  
Frequency  
0
0
0
0
0
1
Not connected  
Not connected  
Cleared on compare match, up-counting. Set on  
compare match, down-counting (non-inverted  
PWM).  
0
0
1
1
0
1
f
TCK0/2/510  
Cleared on compare match, down-counting. Set  
on compare match, up-counting (inverted PWM).  
fTCK0/2/510  
1
0
0
1
0
1
Not connected  
1
1
0
Not connected  
1
Cleared on compare match, set on overflow  
Set on compare match, cleared on overflow  
fTCK0/2/256  
TCK0/2/256  
1
1
f
Note:  
1. n = 0 or 2  
Note that in PWM mode, the value to be written to the Output Compare Register is first  
transferred to a temporary location and then latched into the OCR when the  
Timer/Counter reaches $FF. This prevents the occurrence of odd-length PWM pulses  
(glitches) in the event of an unsynchronized OCR0 or OCR2 write. See Figure 33 and  
Figure 34 for examples.  
45  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Figure 33. Effects of Unsynchronized OCR Latching in Up/Down Mode  
Compare Value changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OCn  
Synchronized OCn Latch  
Compare Value changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OCn  
Glitch  
Unsynchronized OCn Latch  
Figure 34. Effects of Unsynchronized OCR Latching in Overflow Mode.  
Compare Value changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OCn  
Synchronized OCn Latch  
Compare Value changes  
Counter Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OCn  
Glitch  
Unsynchronized OCn Latch  
Note:  
n = 0 or 2 (Figure 33 and Figure 34)  
During the time between the write and the latch operation, a read from the Output Com-  
pare Registers will read the contents of the temporary location. This means that the  
most recently written value always will read out of OCR0 and OCR2.  
When the Output Compare Register contains $00 or $FF, and the up/down PWM mode  
is selected, the output PB0(OC0/PWM0)/PB1(OC2/PWM2) is updated to low or high on  
the next compare match according to the settings of COMn1/COMn0. This is shown in  
Table 13. In overflow PWM mode, the output PB0(OC0/PWM0)/PB1(OC2/PWM2) is  
held low or high only when the Output Compare Register contains $FF.  
Table 13. PWM Outputs OCRn = $00 or $FF(1)(2)  
COMn1  
COMn0  
OCRn  
$00  
Output PWMn  
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
L
H
H
L
$FF  
$00  
$FF  
Note:  
1. n = 0 or 2  
2. In overflow PWM mode, the table above is only valid for OCRn = $FF.  
46  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
In up/down PWM mode, the Timer Overflow Flag (TOV0 or TOV2) is set when the  
counter advances from $00. In overflow PWM mode, the Timer Overflow Flag is set as  
in normal Timer/Counter mode. Timer Overflow Interrupt0 and 2 operate exactly as in  
normal Timer/Counter mode, i.e., they are executed when TOV0 or TOV2 are set, pro-  
vided that Timer Overflow Interrupt and global interrupts are enabled. This also applies  
to the Timer Output Compare flag and interrupt.  
Asynchronous Status  
Register – ASSR  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$26 ($46)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
AS2  
R/W  
0
TCN2UB  
OCR2UB  
TCR2UB  
ASSR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7..4 Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 AS2: Asynchronous Timer/Counter2 Mode  
When this bit is cleared (zero), Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the internal system  
clock, CK. If AS2 is set, the Timer/Counter2 is clocked from the TOSC1 pin. Pins PD4  
and PD5 become connected to a crystal Oscillator and cannot be used as general I/O  
pins. When the value of this bit is changed, the contents of TCNT2, OCR2 and TCCR2  
might get corrupted.  
• Bit 2 TCN2UB: Timer/Counter2 Update Busy  
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCNT2 is written, this bit becomes  
set (one). When TCNT2 has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit  
is cleared (zero) by hardware. A logical “0” in this bit indicates that TCNT2 is ready to be  
updated with a new value.  
• Bit 1 OCR2UB: Output Compare Register2 Update Busy  
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and OCR2 is written, this bit becomes  
set (one). When OCR2 has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit is  
cleared (zero) by hardware. A logical “0” in this bit indicates that OCR2 is ready to be  
updated with a new value.  
• Bit 0 TCR2UB: Timer/Counter Control Register2 Update Busy  
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously and TCCR2 is written, this bit becomes  
set (one). When TCCR2 has been updated from the temporary storage register, this bit  
is cleared (zero) by hardware. A logical “0” in this bit indicates that TCCR2 is ready to be  
updated with a new value.  
If a write is performed to any of the three Timer/Counter2 Registers while its update  
Busy Flag is set (one), the updated value might get corrupted and cause an uninten-  
tional interrupt to occur.  
The mechanisms for reading TCNT2, OCR2 and TCCR2 are different. When reading  
TCNT2, the actual timer value is read. When reading OCR2 or TCCR2, the value in the  
temporary storage register is read.  
47  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Asynchronous Operation of  
Timer/Counter2  
When Timer/Counter2 operates asynchronously, some considerations must be taken:  
Warning: When switching between asynchronous and synchronous clocking of  
Timer/Counter2, the Timer Registers TCNT2, OCR2, and TCCR2 might get  
corrupted. A safe procedure for switching clock source is:  
1. Disable the Timer/Counter2 interrupts by clearing OCIE2 and TOIE2.  
2. Select clock source by setting AS2 as appropriate.  
3. Write new values to TCNT2, OCR2, and TCCR2.  
4. To switch to asynchronous operation: Wait for TCN2UB, OCR2UB, and  
TCR2UB.  
5. Enable interrupts, if needed.  
The Oscillator is optimized for use with a 32,768 Hz watch crystal. An external clock  
signal applied to this pin goes through the same amplifier having a bandwidth of  
256 kHz. The external clock signal should therefore be in the interval 0 Hz -  
256 kHz. The frequency of the clock signal applied to the TOSC1 pin must be lower  
than one fourth of the CPU main clock frequency.  
When writing to one of the registers TCNT2, OCR2, or TCCR2, the value is  
transferred to a temporary register, and latched after two positive edges on TOSC1.  
The user should not write a new value before the contents of the temporary register  
have been transferred to its destination. Each of the three mentioned registers have  
their individual temporary register, which means that e.g., writing to TCNT2 does not  
disturb an OCR2 write in progress. To detect that a transfer to the destination  
register has taken place, a Asynchronous Status Register – ASSR has been  
implemented.  
When entering Power-save mode after having written to TCNT2, OCR2 or TCCR2,  
the user must wait until the written register has been updated if Timer/Counter2 is  
used to wake up the device. Otherwise, the MCU will go to sleep before the changes  
have had any effect. This is extremely important if the Output Compare2 interrupt is  
used to wake up the device; output compare is disabled during write to OCR2 or  
TCNT2. If the write cycle is not finished (i.e., the MCU enters sleep mode before the  
OCR2UB bit returns to zero), the device will never get a compare match and the  
MCU will not wake up.  
If Timer/Counter2 is used to wake up the device from Power-save mode,  
precautions must be taken if the user wants to re-enter Power-save mode: The  
interrupt logic needs one TOSC1 cycle to be reset. If the time between wake-up and  
re-entering Power-save mode is less than one TOSC1 cycle, the interrupt will not  
occur and the device will fail to wake up. If the user is in doubt whether the time  
before re-entering Power-save is sufficient, the following algorithm can be used to  
ensure that one TOSC1 cycle has elapsed:  
1. Write a value to TCCR2, TCNT2, or OCR2.  
2. Wait until the corresponding Update Busy Flag in ASSR returns to zero.  
3. Enter Power-save mode.  
When asynchronous operation is selected, the 32 kHz Oscillator for Timer/Counter2  
is always running, except in Power-down mode. After a Power-up Reset or wake-up  
from power-down, the user should be aware of the fact that this Oscillator might take  
as long as one second to stabilize. The user is advised to wait for at least one  
second before using Timer/Counter2 after power-up or wake-up from power-down.  
The contents of all Timer/Counter2 Registers must be considered lost after a wake-  
up from power-down, due to unstable clock signal upon start-up, regardless of  
whether the Oscillator is in use or a clock signal is applied to the TOSC pin.  
48  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Description of wake-up from Power-save mode when the timer is clocked  
asynchronously: When the interrupt condition is met, the wake-up process is started  
on the following cycle of the timer clock, that is, the timer is always advanced by at  
least 1 before the processor can read the counter value. The Interrupt Flags are  
updated three processor cycles after the processor clock has started. During these  
cycles, the processor executes instructions, but the interrupt condition is not  
readable and the interrupt routine has not started yet.  
During asynchronous operation, the synchronization of the Interrupt Flags for the  
asynchronous timer takes three processor cycles plus one timer cycle. The timer is  
therefore advanced by at least 1 before the processor can read the timer value,  
causing the setting of the Interrupt Flag. The output compare pin is changed on the  
timer clock and is not synchronized to the processor clock.  
Timer/Counter1  
Figure 35 shows the block diagram for Timer/Counter1.  
Figure 35. Timer/Counter1 Block Diagram  
T/C1 OVER- T/C1 COMPARE  
T/C1 COMPARE  
MATCHB IRQ  
T/C1 INPUT  
CAPTURE IRQ  
FLOW IRQ  
MATCHA IRQ  
TIMER INT. MASK  
REGISTER (TIMSK)  
TIMER INT. FLAG  
REGISTER (TIFR)  
T/C1 CONTROL  
REGISTER A (TCCR1A)  
T/C1 CONTROL  
REGISTER B (TCCR1B)  
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS  
IO REGISTER (SFIOR)  
15  
8
7
0
0
CK  
T1  
T/C1 INPUT CAPTURE REGISTER (ICR1)  
CONTROL  
LOGIC  
CAPTURE  
TRIGGER  
15  
8
7
T/C CLEAR  
T/C CLOCK SOURCE  
UP/DOWN  
TIMER/COUNTER1 (TCNT1)  
15  
15  
8
7
0
0
15  
8
7
0
0
16 BIT COMPARATOR  
16 BIT COMPARATOR  
8
7
15  
8
7
TIMER/COUNTER1 OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER A  
TIMER/COUNTER1 OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER B  
The 16-bit Timer/Counter1 can select clock source from CK, prescaled CK or an exter-  
nal pin. In addition, it can be stopped as described in “Timer/Counter1 Control Register  
B TCCR1B”. The different Status Flags (Overflow, Compare Match, and Capture  
Event) are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR). Control signals  
are found in the Timer/Counter1 Control Registers (TCCR1A and TCCR1B). The inter-  
rupt enable/disable settings for Timer/Counter1 are found in the Timer/Counter Interrupt  
Mask Register (TIMSK).  
When Timer/Counter1 is externally clocked, the external signal is synchronized with the  
Oscillator frequency of the CPU. To assure proper sampling of the external clock, the  
minimum time between two external clock transitions must be at least one internal CPU  
49  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
clock period. The external clock signal is sampled on the rising edge of the internal CPU  
clock.  
The 16-bit Timer/Counter1 features both a high-resolution and a high-accuracy usage  
with the lower prescaling opportunities. Similarly, the high-prescaling opportunities  
make the Timer/Counter1 useful for lower speed functions or exact timing functions with  
infrequent actions.  
The Timer/Counter1 supports two Output Compare functions using the Output Compare  
Register 1 A and B (OCR1A and OCR1B) as the data sources to be compared to the  
Timer/Counter1 contents. The Output Compare functions include optional clearing of  
the counter on compareA match and actions on the Output Compare pins on both com-  
pare matches.  
Timer/Counter1 can also be used as an 8-, 9-, or 10-bit Pulse Width Modulator. In this  
mode the counter and the OCR1A/OCR1B Registers serve as a dual glitch-free stand-  
alone PWM with centered pulses. Alternatively, the Timer/Counter1 can be configured  
to operate at twice the speed in PWM mode, but without centered pulses. Refer to page  
55 for a detailed description of this function.  
The Input Capture function of Timer/Counter1 provides a capture of the Timer/Counter1  
contents to the Input Capture Register (ICR1), triggered by an external event on the  
Input Capture Pin (ICP). The actual capture event settings are defined by the  
Timer/Counter1 Control Register (TCCR1B). In addition, the Analog Comparator can be  
set to trigger the Input Capture. Refer to the section, “The Analog Comparator”, for  
details on this. The ICP pin logic is shown in Figure 36.  
Figure 36. ICP Pin Schematic Diagram  
If the noise canceler function is enabled, the actual trigger condition for the Capture  
Event is monitored over four samples, and all four must be equal to activate the Capture  
Flag.  
Timer/Counter1 Control  
Register A – TCCR1A  
Bit  
7
COM1A1  
R/W  
6
COM1A0  
R/W  
5
COM1B1  
R/W  
4
COM1B0  
R/W  
3
FOC1A  
R/w  
0
2
FOC1B  
R/W  
0
1
PWM11  
R/W  
0
0
PWM10  
R/W  
0
TCCR1A  
$2F ($4F)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
0
0
0
0
• Bits 7, 6 COM1A1, COM1A0: Compare Output Mode1A, Bits 1 and 0  
The COM1A1 and COM1A0 control bits determine any output pin action following a  
compare match in Timer/Counter1. Any output pin actions affect pin OC1A (Output  
CompareA pin 1). This is an alternative function to an I/O port, and the corresponding  
direction control bit must be set (one) to control an output pin. The control configuration  
is shown in Table 14.  
50  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
• Bits 5, 4 COM1B1, COM1B0: Compare Output Mode1B, Bits 1 and 0  
The COM1B1 and COM1B0 control bits determine any output pin action following a  
compare match in Timer/Counter1. Any output pin actions affect pin OC1B (Output  
CompareB). This is an alternative function to an I/O port, and the corresponding direc-  
tion control bit must be set (one) to control an output pin. The following control  
configuration is given:  
Table 14. Compare 1 Mode Select(1)  
COM1X1  
COM1X0  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Timer/Counter1 disconnected from output pin OC1X  
Toggle the OC1X output line.  
Clear the OC1X output line (to zero).  
Set the OC1X output line (to one).  
Note:  
1. X = A or B  
In PWM mode, these bits have a different function. Refer to Table 18 for a detailed  
description.  
• Bit 3 FOC1A: Force Output Compare1A  
Writing a logical “1” to this bit forces a change in the compare match output pin PD5  
according to the values already set in COM1A1 and COM1A0. If the COM1A1 and  
COM1A0 bits are written in the same cycle as FOC1A, the new settings will not take  
effect until the next compare match or forced compare match occurs. The Force Output  
Compare bit can be used to change the output pin without waiting for a compare match  
in the timer. The automatic action programmed in COM1A1 and COM1A0 happens as if  
a Compare Match had occurred, but no interrupt is generated and it will not clear the  
timer even if CTC1 in TCCR1B is set. The FOC1A bit will always be read as zero. The  
setting of the FOC1A bit has no effect in PWM mode.  
• Bit 2 FOC1B: Force Output Compare1B  
Writing a logical “1” to this bit forces a change in the compare match output pin PE2  
according to the values already set in COM1B1 and COM1B0. If the COM1B1 and  
COM1B0 bits are written in the same cycle as FOC1B, the new settings will not take  
effect until the next compare match or forced compare match occurs. The Force Output  
Compare bit can be used to change the output pin without waiting for a compare match  
in the timer. The automatic action programmed in COM1B1 and COM1B0 happens as if  
a Compare Match had occurred, but no interrupt is generated. The FOC1B bit will  
always be read as zero. The setting of the FOC1B bit has no effect in PWM mode.  
51  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
• Bits 1..0 PWM11, PWM10: Pulse Width Modulator Select Bits  
These bits select PWM operation of Timer/Counter1 as specified in Table 15. This mode  
is described on page 55.  
Table 15. PWM Mode Select  
PWM11  
PWM10  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
PWM operation of Timer/Counter1 is disabled.  
Timer/Counter1 is an 8-bit PWM.  
Timer/Counter1 is a 9-bit PWM.  
Timer/Counter1 is a 10-bit PWM.  
Timer/Counter1 Control  
Register B – TCCR1B  
Bit  
7
6
ICES1  
R/W  
0
5
4
3
CTC1  
R/W  
0
2
CS12  
R/W  
0
1
CS11  
R/W  
0
0
CS10  
R/W  
0
$2E ($4E)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
ICNC1  
R/W  
0
TCCR1B  
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 ICNC1: Input Capture1 Noise Canceler (4 CKs)  
When the ICNC1 bit is cleared (zero), the Input Capture trigger noise canceler function  
is disabled. The Input Capture is triggered at the first rising/falling edge sampled on the  
ICP (Input Capture pin) as specified. When the ICNC1 bit is set (one), four successive  
samples are measured on the ICP (Input Capture pin), and all samples must be high/low  
according to the Input Capture trigger specification in the ICES1 bit. The actual sampling  
frequency is XTAL clock frequency.  
• Bit 6 ICES1: Input Capture1 Edge Select  
While the ICES1 bit is cleared (zero), the Timer/Counter1 contents are transferred to the  
Input Capture Register (ICR1) on the falling edge of the Input Capture pin (ICP). While  
the ICES1 bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 contents are transferred to the Input Cap-  
ture Register (ICR1) on the rising edge of the Input Capture pin (ICP).  
• Bits 5, 4 Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 CTC1: Clear Timer/Counter1 on Compare Match  
When the CTC1 control bit is set (one), the Timer/Counter1 is reset to $0000 in the clock  
cycle after a compareA match. If the CTC1 control bit is cleared, Timer/Counter1 contin-  
ues counting and is unaffected by a compare match. When a prescaling of 1 is used and  
the Compare A Register is set to C, the timer will count as follows if CTC1 is set:  
... | C-1 | C | 0 | 1 | ...  
When the prescaler is set to divide by 8, the timer will count like this:  
... | C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1, C-1 | C, C, C, C, C, C, C, C | 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 | ...  
In PWM mode, this bit has a different function. If the CTC1 bit is cleared in PWM mode,  
the Timer/Counter1 acts as an up/down counter. If the CTC1 bit is set (one), the  
Timer/Counter wraps when it reaches the TOP value. Refer to page 55 for a detailed  
description.  
52  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
• Bits 2, 1, 0 CS12, CS11, CS10: Clock Select1, Bits 2, 1 and 0  
The Clock Select1 bits 2, 1 and 0 define the prescaling source of Timer/Counter1.  
Table 16. Clock 1 Prescale Select  
CS12  
CS11  
CS10  
Description  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Stop, the Timer/Counter1 is stopped.  
CK  
CK/8  
CK/64  
CK/256  
CK/1024  
External Pin T1, falling edge  
External Pin T1, rising edge  
The Stop condition provides a Timer Enable/Disable function. The CK down divided  
modes are scaled directly from the CK Oscillator clock. If the external pin modes are  
used for Timer/Counter1, transitions on PB1/(T1) will clock the counter even if the pin is  
configured as an output. This feature can give the user software control of the counting.  
Timer/Counter1 Register –  
TCNT1H AND TCNT1L  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
$2D ($4D)  
$2C ($4C)  
MSB  
TCNT1H  
TCNT1L  
LSB  
0
7
R/W  
R/W  
0
6
R/W  
R/W  
0
5
R/W  
R/W  
0
4
R/W  
R/W  
0
3
R/W  
R/W  
0
2
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
R/W  
R/W  
0
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
This 16-bit register contains the prescaled value of the 16-bit Timer/Counter1. To  
ensure that both the high and low bytes are read and written simultaneously when the  
CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary regis-  
ter (TEMP). This temporary register is also used when accessing OCR1A, OCR1B, and  
ICR1. If the main program and interrupt routines perform access to registers using  
TEMP, interrupts must be disabled during access from the main program and interrupt  
routines.  
TCNT1 Timer/Counter1 Write  
When the CPU writes to the High byte TCNT1H, the written data is placed in the TEMP  
Register. Next, when the CPU writes the Low byte TCNT1L, this byte of data is com-  
bined with the byte data in the TEMP Register and all 16 bits are written to the TCNT1  
Timer/Counter1 Register simultaneously. Consequently, the High byte TCNT1H must  
be accessed first for a full 16-bit register write operation.  
TCNT1 Timer/Counter1 Read  
When the CPU reads the Low byte TCNT1L, the data of the Low byte TCNT1L is sent to  
the CPU and the data of the High byte TCNT1H is placed in the TEMP Register. When  
the CPU reads the data in the High byte TCNT1H, the CPU receives the data in the  
TEMP Register. Consequently, the Low byte TCNT1L must be accessed first for a full  
16-bit register read operation.  
53  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
The Timer/Counter1 is realized as an up or up/down (in PWM mode) counter with read  
and write access. If Timer/Counter1 is written to and a clock source is selected, the  
Timer/Counter1 continues counting in the timer clock cycle after it is preset with the writ-  
ten value.  
Timer/Counter1 Output  
Compare Register – OCR1AH  
AND OCR1AL  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
$2B ($4B)  
$2A ($4A)  
MSB  
OCR1AH  
OCR1AL  
LSB  
0
7
R/W  
R/W  
0
6
R/W  
R/W  
0
5
R/W  
R/W  
0
4
R/W  
R/W  
0
3
R/W  
R/W  
0
2
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
R/W  
R/W  
0
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Timer/Counter1 Output  
Compare Register – OCR1BH  
AND OCR1BL  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
$29 ($49)  
$28 ($48)  
MSB  
OCR1BH  
OCR1BL  
LSB  
7
R/W  
R/W  
0
6
R/W  
R/W  
0
5
R/W  
R/W  
0
4
R/W  
R/W  
0
3
R/W  
R/W  
0
2
R/W  
R/W  
0
1
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit read/write registers.  
The Timer/Counter1 Output Compare Registers contain the data to be continuously  
compared with Timer/Counter1. Actions on compare matches are specified in the  
Timer/Counter1 Control and Status Registers. A software write to the Timer/Counter  
Register blocks compare matches in the next Timer/Counter clock cycle. This prevents  
immediate interrupts when initializing the Timer/Counter.  
A compare match will set the Compare Interrupt Flag in the CPU clock cycle following  
the compare event.  
Since the Output Compare Registers (OCR1A and OCR1B) are 16-bit registers, a tem-  
porary register (TEMP) is used when OCR1A/B are written to ensure that both bytes are  
updated simultaneously. When the CPU writes the High byte, OCR1AH or OCR1BH,  
the data is temporarily stored in the TEMP Register. When the CPU writes the Low byte,  
OCR1AL or OCR1BL, the TEMP Register is simultaneously written to OCR1AH or  
OCR1BH. Consequently, the High byte OCR1AH or OCR1BH must be written first for a  
full 16-bit register write operation.  
The TEMP Register is also used when accessing TCNT1 and ICR1. If the main program  
and interrupt routines perform access to registers using TEMP, interrupts must be dis-  
abled during access from the main program and interrupt routines.  
Timer/Counter1 Input Capture  
Register – ICR1H AND ICR1L  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
$25 ($45)  
$24 ($44)  
MSB  
ICR1H  
ICR1L  
LSB  
0
7
R
R
0
6
R
R
0
5
R
R
0
4
R
R
0
3
R
R
0
2
R
R
0
1
R
R
0
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
54  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
The Input Capture Register is a 16-bit read-only register.  
When the rising or falling edge (according to the Input Capture edge setting, ICES1) of  
the signal at the Input Capture pin (ICP) is detected, the current value of the  
Timer/Counter1 Register (TCNT1) is transferred to the Input Capture Register (ICR1). In  
the same cycle, the Input Capture Flag (ICF1) is set (one).  
Since the Input Capture Register (ICR1) is a 16-bit register, a temporary register  
(TEMP) is used when ICR1 is read to ensure that both bytes are read simultaneously.  
When the CPU reads the Low byte ICR1L, the data is sent to the CPU and the data of  
the High byte ICR1H is placed in the TEMP Register. When the CPU reads the data in  
the High byte ICR1H, the CPU receives the data in the TEMP Register. Consequently,  
the Low byte ICR1L must be accessed first for a full 16-bit register read operation.  
The TEMP Register is also used when accessing TCNT1, OCR1A and OCR1B. If the  
main program and interrupt routines perform access to registers using TEMP, interrupts  
must be disabled during access from the main program and interrupt routine.  
Timer/Counter1 in PWM Mode When the PWM mode is selected, Timer/Counter1 and the Output Compare Register1A  
(OCR1A) and the Output Compare Register1B (OCR1B) form a dual 8-, 9-, or 10-bit,  
free-running, glitch-free, and phase-correct PWM with outputs on the PD5(OC1A) and  
PE2(OC1B) pins. In this mode the Timer/Counter1 acts as an up/down counter, count-  
ing up from $0000 to TOP (see Table 17), where it turns and counts down again to zero  
before the cycle is repeated. When the counter value matches the contents of the 8, 9,  
or 10 least significant bits (depends of the resolution) of OCR1A or OCR1B, the  
PD5(OC1A)/PE2(OC1B) pins are set or cleared according to the settings of the  
COM1A1/COM1A0 or COM1B1/COM1B0 bits in the Timer/Counter1 Control Register  
(TCCR1A). Refer to Table 18 for details.  
Alternatively, the Timer/Counter1 can be configured to a PWM that operates at twice the  
speed as in the mode described above. Then the Timer/Counter1 and the Output Com-  
pare Register1A (OCR1A) and the Output Compare Register1B (OCR1B) form a dual  
8-, 9- or 10-bit, free-running and glitch-free PWM with outputs on the PD5(OC1A) and  
PE2(OC1B) pins.  
Table 17. Timer TOP Values and PWM Frequency  
CTC1  
PWM11  
PWM10  
PWM Resolution  
Timer TOP Value  
$00FF (255)  
$01FF (511)  
$03FF (1023)  
$00FF (255)  
$01FF (511)  
$03FF (1023)  
Frequency  
TCK1/510  
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
8-bit  
9-bit  
f
fTCK1/1022  
fTCK1/2046  
10-bit  
8-bit  
f
TCK1/256  
9-bit  
fTCK1/512  
10-bit  
fTCK1/1024  
As shown in Table 17, the PWM operates at either 8-, 9-, or 10-bit resolution. Note the  
unused bits in OCR1A, OCR1B and TCNT1 will automatically be written to zero by hard-  
ware, i.e., bits 9 to 15 will be set to zero in OCR1A, OCR1B and TCNT1 if the 9-bit PWM  
resolution is selected. This makes it possible for the user to perform read-modify-write  
operations in any of the three resolution modes and the unused bits will be treated as  
don’t care.  
55  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Table 18. Compare1 Mode Select in PWM Mode(1)  
CTC1 COM1X1 COM1X0 Effect on OCX1  
0
0
0
0
0
1
Not connected  
Not connected  
Cleared on compare match, up-counting. Set on compare  
match, down-counting (non-inverted PWM).  
0
0
1
1
0
1
Cleared on compare match, down-counting. Set on compare  
match, up-counting (inverted PWM).  
1
0
0
1
0
1
Not connected  
1
1
0
Not connected  
1
Cleared on compare match, set on overflow.  
Set on compare match, cleared on overflow.  
1
1
Note:  
1. X = A or B  
Note that in the PWM mode, the 8, 9 or 10 least significant OCR1A/OCR1B bits  
(depends of resolution), when written, are transferred to a temporary location. They are  
latched when Timer/Counter1 reaches the value TOP. This prevents the occurrence of  
odd-length PWM pulses (glitches) in the event of an unsynchronized OCR1A/OCR1B  
write. See Figure 37 and Figure 38 for an example in each mode.  
Figure 37. Effects on Unsynchronized OCR1 Latching(1)  
Compare Value changes  
Counter alue  
V
Compare V  
alue  
Output OC1X  
PWM  
Synchronized  
OCR1X Latch  
Compare Value changes  
Counter  
Value  
Compare Value  
PWM Output OC1X  
Glitch  
Unsynchronized  
OCR1X Latch  
Note:  
1. Note: X = A or B  
56  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 38. Effects of Unsynchronized OCR1 Latching in Overflow Mode1  
PWM Output OC1x  
PWM Output OC1x  
Synchronized OC1x Latch  
Unsynchronized OC1x Latch  
Note:  
1. Note: X = A or B  
During the time between the write and the latch operation, a read from OCR1A or  
OCR1B will read the contents of the temporary location. This means that the most  
recently written value always will read out of OCR1A/B.  
When the OCR1X contains $0000 or TOP, and the up/down PWM mode is selected, the  
output OC1A/OC1B is updated to low or high on the next compare match according to  
the settings of COM1A1/COM1A0 or COM1B1/COM1B0. This is shown in Table 19. In  
overflow PWM mode, the output OC1A/OC1B is held low or high only when the Output  
Compare Register contains TOP.  
Table 19. PWM Outputs OCR1X = $0000 or TOP(1)  
COM1X1  
COM1X0  
OCR1X  
$0000  
TOP  
Output OC1X  
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
L
H
H
L
$0000  
TOP  
Note:  
1. X = A or B  
In overflow PWM mode, the table above is only valid for OCR1X = TOP.  
In up/down PWM mode, the Timer Overflow Flag1 (TOV1) is set when the counter  
advances from $0000. In overflow PWM mode, the Timer Overflow Flag is set as in nor-  
mal Timer/Counter mode. Timer Overflow Interrupt1 operates exactly as in normal  
Timer/Counter mode, i.e., it is executed when TOV1 is set, provided that Timer Overflow  
Interrupt1 and global interrupts are enabled. This also applies to the Timer Output  
Compare1 Flags and interrupts.  
57  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Watchdog Timer  
The Watchdog Timer is clocked from a separate On-chip Oscillator that runs at 1 MHz.  
This is the typical value at VCC = 5V. See characterization data for typical values at other  
V
CC levels. By controlling the Watchdog Timer prescaler, the Watchdog Reset interval  
can be adjusted (see Table 20 for a detailed description). The WDR (Watchdog Reset)  
instruction resets the Watchdog Timer. Eight different clock cycle periods can be  
selected to determine the reset period. If the reset period expires without another  
Watchdog Reset, the ATmega161 resets and executes from the Reset Vector. For tim-  
ing details on the Watchdog Reset, refer to page 28.  
To prevent unintentional disabling of the Watchdog, a special turn-off sequence must be  
followed when the Watchdog is disabled. Refer to the description of the Watchdog Timer  
Control Register for details.  
Figure 39. Watchdog Timer  
Watchdog Timer Control  
Register – WDTCR  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
WDTOE  
R/W  
0
3
WDE  
R/W  
0
2
WDP2  
R/W  
0
1
WDP1  
R/W  
0
0
WDP0  
R/W  
0
$21 ($41)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
WDTCR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7..5 Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 4 WDTOE: Watchdog Turn-off Enable  
This bit must be set (one) when the WDE bit is cleared. Otherwise, the Watchdog will  
not be disabled. Once set, hardware will clear this bit to zero after four clock cycles.  
Refer to the description of the WDE bit for a Watchdog disable procedure.  
• Bit 3 WDE: Watchdog Enable  
When the WDE is set (one), the Watchdog Timer is enabled and if the WDE is cleared  
(zero), the Watchdog Timer function is disabled. WDE can only be cleared if the  
58  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
WDTOE bit is set (one). To disable an enabled Watchdog Timer, the following proce-  
dure must be followed:  
1. In the same operation, write a logical “1” to WDTOE and WDE. A logical “1” must  
be written to WDE even though it is set to one before the disable operation starts.  
2. Within the next four clock cycles, write a logical “0” to WDE. This disables the  
Watchdog.  
• Bits 2..0 WDP2, WDP1, WDP0: Watchdog Timer Prescaler 2, 1 and 0  
The WDP2, WDP1 and WDP0 bits determine the Watchdog Timer prescaling when the  
Watchdog Timer is enabled. The different prescaling values and their corresponding  
time-out periods are shown in Table 20.  
Table 20. Watchdog Timer Prescale Select (1)  
Number of WDT  
Oscillator Cycles  
Typical Time-out  
at VCC = 3.0V  
Typical Time-out  
at VCC = 5.0V  
WDP2 WDP1 WDP0  
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
16K  
32K  
47 ms  
94 ms  
0.19 s  
0.38 s  
0.75 s  
1.5 s  
15 ms  
30 ms  
60 ms  
0.12 s  
0.24 s  
0.49 s  
0.97 s  
1.9 s  
0
0
64K  
0
128K  
256K  
512K  
1,024K  
2,048K  
1
1
1
3.0 s  
1
6.0 s  
Note:  
1. The frequency of the Watchdog Oscillator is voltage-dependent, as shown in the  
Electrical Characteristics section.  
The WDR (Watchdog Reset) instruction should always be executed before the  
Watchdog Timer is enabled. This ensures that the reset period will be in accordance  
with the Watchdog Timer prescale settings. If the Watchdog Timer is enabled without  
reset, the Watchdog Timer may not start counting from zero.  
To avoid unintentional MCU Reset, the Watchdog Timer should be disabled or reset  
before changing the Watchdog Timer Prescale Select.  
59  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
EEPROM Read/Write The EEPROM Access Registers are accessible in the I/O space.  
Access  
The write access time is in the range of 1.9 - 3.4 ms, depending on the frequency of the  
RC Oscillator used to time the EEPROM access time. See Table 22 for details. A self-  
timing function, however, lets the user software detect when the next byte can be writ-  
ten. If the user code contains code that writes the EEPROM, some precaution must be  
taken. In heavily filtered power supplies, VCC is likely to rise or fall slowly on power-  
up/down. This causes the device for some period of time to run at a voltage lower than  
specified as minimum for the clock frequency used. CPU operation under these condi-  
tions is likely cause the Program Counter to perform unintentional jumps and eventually  
execute the EEPROM write code. To secure EEPROM integrity, the user is advised to  
use an external Under-voltage Reset circuit in this case.  
In order to prevent unintentional EEPROM writes, a specific write procedure must be fol-  
lowed. Refer to the description of the EEPROM Control Register for details on this.  
When the EEPROM is written, the CPU is halted for two clock cycles before the next  
instruction is executed. When the EEPROM is read, the CPU is halted for four clock  
cycles before the next instruction is executed.  
EEPROM Address Register –  
EEARH and EEARL  
Bit  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
EEAR8  
EEAR0  
0
$1F ($3F)  
$1E ($3E)  
EEARH  
EEARL  
EEAR7  
EEAR6  
EEAR5  
EEAR4  
EEAR3  
EEAR2  
EEAR1  
7
R
6
R
5
R
4
R
3
R
2
R
1
R
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
R/W  
X
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
• Bits 15..9 Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and will always read as zero.  
• Bits 8..0 EEAR8..0: EEPROM Address  
The EEPROM Address Registers (EEARH and EEARL) specify the EEPROM address  
in the 512-byte EEPROM space. The EEPROM data bytes are addressed linearly  
between 0 and 511. The initial value of EEAR is undefined. A proper value must be writ-  
ten before the EEPROM may be accessed.  
EEPROM Data Register –  
EEDR  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$1D ($3D)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
EEDR  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bits 7..0 EEDR7..0: EEPROM Data  
For the EEPROM write operation, the EEDR Register contains the data to be written to  
the EEPROM in the address given by the EEAR Register. For the EEPROM read oper-  
ation, the EEDR contains the data read out from the EEPROM at the address given by  
EEAR.  
60  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
EEPROM Control Register –  
EECR  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
EERIE  
R/W  
0
2
EEMWE  
R/W  
0
1
EEWE  
R/W  
X
0
EERE  
R/W  
0
$1C ($3C)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
EECR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7..4 Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 EERIE: EEPROM Ready Interrupt Enable  
When the I-bit in SREG and EERIE are set (one), the EEPROM Ready Interrupt is  
enabled. When cleared (zero), the interrupt is disabled. The EEPROM Ready interrupt  
generates a constant interrupt when EEWE is cleared (zero).  
• Bit 2 EEMWE: EEPROM Master Write Enable  
The EEMWE bit determines whether setting EEWE to one causes the EEPROM to be  
written. When EEMWE is set (one), setting EEWE will write data to the EEPROM at the  
selected address. If EEMWE is zero, setting EEWE will have no effect. When EEMWE  
has been set (one) by software, hardware clears the bit to zero after four clock cycles.  
See the description of the EEWE bit for an EEPROM write procedure.  
• Bit 1 EEWE: EEPROM Write Enable  
The EEPROM Write Enable Signal (EEWE) is the write strobe to the EEPROM. When  
address and data are correctly set up, the EEWE bit must be set to write the value into  
the EEPROM. The EEMWE bit must be set when the logical “1” is written to EEWE, oth-  
erwise no EEPROM write takes place. The following procedure should be followed  
when writing the EEPROM (the order of steps 2 and 3 is not essential):  
1. Wait until EEWE becomes zero.  
2. Write new EEPROM address to EEAR (optional).  
3. Write new EEPROM data to EEDR (optional).  
4. Write a logical “1” to the EEMWE bit in EECR (to be able to write a logical “1” to  
the EEMWE bit, the EEWE bit must be written to zero in the same cycle).  
5. Within four clock cycles after setting EEMWE, write a logical “1” to EEWE.  
Caution: An interrupt between step 4 and step 5 will make the write cycle fail, since the  
EEPROM Master Write Enable will time-out. If an interrupt routine accessing the  
EEPROM is interrupting another EEPROM access, the EEAR or EEDR Register will be  
modified, causing the interrupted EEPROM access to fail. It is recommended to have  
the Global Interrupt Flag cleared during the four last steps to avoid these problems.  
When the write access time has elapsed, the EEWE bit is cleared (zero) by hardware.  
The user software can poll this bit and wait for a zero before writing the next byte. When  
EEWE has been set, the CPU is halted for two cycles before the next instruction is  
executed.  
• Bit 0 EERE: EEPROM Read Enable  
The EEPROM Read Enable signal (EERE) is the read strobe to the EEPROM. When  
the correct address is set up in the EEAR Register, the EERE bit must be set. When the  
EERE bit is cleared (zero) by hardware, requested data is found in the EEDR Register.  
The EEPROM read access takes one instruction and there is no need to poll the EERE  
61  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
bit. When EERE has been set, the CPU is halted for four cycles before the next instruc-  
tion is executed.  
The user should poll the EEWE bit before starting the read operation. If a write operation  
is in progress when new data or address is written to the EEPROM I/O Registers, the  
write operation will be interrupted and the result is undefined.  
An RC Oscillator is used to time EEPROM write access. The table below lists the typical  
programming time listed for EEPROM access from CPU.  
Table 21. EEPROM Access Time from CPU“See “Typical Characteristics” on page 138  
to find RC Oscillator frequency.” on page 62(1)  
No. of RC  
Oscillator Cycles  
MinProgramming  
Time  
Max Programming  
Time  
Symbol  
EEPROM write (from CPU)  
2048  
2.0 ms  
3.4 ms  
Note:  
1. See “Typical Characteristics” on page 138 to find RC Oscillator frequency.  
Prevent EEPROM  
Corruption  
During periods of low VCC, the EEPROM data can be corrupted because the supply volt-  
age is too low for the CPU and the EEPROM to operate properly. These issues are the  
same as for board-level systems using the EEPROM, and the same design solutions  
should be applied.  
An EEPROM data corruption can be caused by two situations when the voltage is too  
low. First, a regular write sequence to the EEPROM requires a minimum voltage to  
operate correctly. Secondly, the CPU itself can execute instructions incorrectly if the  
supply voltage for executing instructions is too low.  
EEPROM data corruption can easily be avoided by following these design recommen-  
dations (one is sufficient):  
1. Keep the AVR RESET active (low) during periods of insufficient power supply  
voltage. An external low VCC Reset Protection circuit can be applied.  
2. Keep the AVR core in Power-down Sleep mode during periods of low VCC. This  
will prevent the CPU from attempting to decode and execute instructions, effec-  
tively protecting the EEPROM Registers from unintentional writes.  
3. Store constants in Flash memory if the ability to change memory contents from  
software is not required. Flash memory cannot be updated by the CPU unless  
the boot loader software supports writing to the Flash and the Boot Lock bits are  
configured so that writing to the Flash memory from the CPU is allowed. See  
“Boot Loader Support” on page 110 for details.  
62  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Serial Peripheral  
Interface – SPI  
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows high-speed synchronous data transfer  
between the ATmega161 and peripheral devices or between several AVR devices. The  
ATmega161 SPI features include the following:  
Full-duplex, 3-wire Synchronous Data Transfer  
Master or Slave Operation  
LSB First or MSB First Data Transfer  
Seven Programmable Bit Rates  
End-of-Transmission Interrupt Flag  
Write Collision Flag Protection  
Wake-up from Idle Mode (Slave Mode Only)  
Double-speed (CK/2) Master SPI Mode  
Figure 40. SPI Block Diagram  
DIVIDER  
/2/4/8/16/32/64/128  
63  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
The interconnection between Master and Slave CPUs with SPI is shown in Figure 41.  
The PB7(SCK) pin is the Clock Output in the Master mode and is the clock input in the  
Slave mode. Writing to the SPI Data Register of the Master CPU starts the SPI clock  
generator, and the data written shifts out of the PB5(MOSI) pin and into the PB5(MOSI)  
pin of the Slave CPU. After shifting one byte, the SPI clock generator stops, setting the  
End-of-Transmission Flag (SPIF). If the SPI Interrupt Enable bit (SPIE) in the SPCR  
Register is set, an interrupt is requested. The Slave Select input, PB4(SS), is set low to  
select an individual Slave SPI device. The two Shift Registers in the Master and the  
Slave can be considered as one distributed 16-bit circular Shift Register. This is shown  
in Figure 41. When data is shifted from the Master to the Slave, data is also shifted in  
the opposite direction, simultaneously. This means that during one shift cycle, data in  
the Master and the Slave are interchanged.  
Figure 41. SPI Master-Slave Interconnection  
The system is single-buffered in the transmit direction and double-buffered in the  
receive direction. This means that bytes to be transmitted cannot be written to the SPI  
Data Register before the entire shift cycle is completed. When receiving data, however,  
a received byte must be read from the SPI Data Register before the next byte has been  
completely shifted in. Otherwise, the first byte is lost.  
When the SPI is enabled, the data direction of the MOSI, MISO, SCK and SS pins is  
overridden according to Table 22.  
Table 22. SPI Pin Overrides(1)  
Pin  
Direction, Master SPI  
User Defined  
Input  
Direction, Slave SPI  
MOSI  
MISO  
SCK  
SS  
Input  
User Defined  
Input  
User Defined  
User Defined  
Input  
Note:  
1. See “Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 92 for a detailed description of how to  
define the direction of the user defined SPI pins.  
64  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
SS Pin Functionality  
When the SPI is configured as a Master (MSTR in SPCR is set), the user can determine  
the direction of the SS pin. If SS is configured as an output, the pin is a general output  
pin, which does not affect the SPI system. If SS is configured as an input, it must be held  
high to ensure Master SPI operation. If the SS pin is driven low by peripheral circuitry  
when the SPI is configured as Master with the SS pin defined as an input, the SPI sys-  
tem interprets this as another Master selecting the SPI as a Slave and starting to send  
data to it. To avoid bus contention, the SPI system takes the following actions:  
1. The MSTR bit in SPCR is cleared and the SPI system becomes a Slave. As a  
result of the SPI becoming a Slave, the MOSI and SCK pins become inputs.  
2. The SPIF Flag in SPSR is set, and if the SPI interrupt is enabled and the I-bit in  
SREG is set, the interrupt routine will be executed.  
Thus, when interrupt-driven SPI transmission is used in Master mode, and there exists a  
possibility that SS is driven low. The interrupt should always check that the MSTR bit is  
still set. Once the MSTR bit has been cleared by a Slave select, it must be set by the  
user to re-enable SPI Master mode.  
When the SPI is configured as a Slave, the SS pin is always input. When SS is held low,  
the SPI is activated and MISO becomes an output if configured so by the user. All other  
pins are inputs. When SS is driven high, all pins are inputs and the SPI is passive, which  
means that it will not receive incoming data. Note that the SPI logic will be reset once  
the SS pin is brought high. If the SS pin is brought high during a transmission, the SPI  
will stop sending and receiving immediately and both data received and data sent must  
be considered lost.  
Data Modes  
There are four combinations of SCK phase and polarity with respect to serial data,  
which are determined by control bits CPHA and CPOL. The SPI data transfer formats  
are shown in Figure 42 and Figure 43.  
Figure 42. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 0 and DORD = 0  
65  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
Figure 43. SPI Transfer Format with CPHA = 1 and DORD = 0  
SPI Control Register – SPCR  
Bit  
7
SPIE  
R/W  
0
6
5
DORD  
R/W  
0
4
MSTR  
R/W  
0
3
CPOL  
R/W  
0
2
CPHA  
R/W  
0
1
SPR1  
R/W  
0
0
SPR0  
R/W  
0
$0D ($2D)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
SPE  
R/W  
0
SPCR  
• Bit 7 SPIE: SPI Interrupt Enable  
This bit causes the SPI interrupt to be executed if SPIF bit in the SPSR Register is set  
and if the global interrupt enable bit in SREG is set.  
• Bit 6 SPE: SPI Enable  
When the SPE bit is set (one), the SPI is enabled. This bit must be set to enable any SPI  
operations.  
• Bit 5 DORD: Data Order  
When the DORD bit is set (one), the LSB of the data word is transmitted first.  
When the DORD bit is cleared (zero), the MSB of the data word is transmitted first.  
• Bit 4 MSTR: Master/Slave Select  
This bit selects Master SPI mode when set (one), and Slave SPI mode when cleared  
(zero). If SS is configured as an input and is driven low while MSTR is set, MSTR will be  
cleared and SPIF in SPSR will become set. The user will then have to set MSTR to re-  
enable SPI Master mode.  
• Bit 3 CPOL: Clock Polarity  
When this bit is set (one), SCK is high when idle. When CPOL is cleared (zero), SCK is  
low when idle. Refer to Figure 42 and Figure 43 for additional information.  
• Bit 2 CPHA: Clock Phase  
Refer to Figure 42 or Figure 43 for the functionality of this bit.  
66  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
• Bits 1, 0 SPR1, SPR0: SPI Clock Rate Select 1 and 0  
These two bits control the SCK rate of the device configured as a Master. SPR1 and  
SPR0 have no effect on the Slave. The relationship between SCK and the Oscillator  
Clock frequency (fcl) is shown in Table 23:  
Table 23. Relationship between SCK and the Oscillator Frequency(1)  
SPI2X  
SPR1  
SPR0  
SCK Frequency  
fcl/4  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
fcl/16  
fcl/64  
fcl/128  
fcl/2  
fcl/8  
fcl/32  
fcl/64  
Note:  
1. When the SPI is configured as Slave, the SPI is only guaranteed to work at fcl/4.  
SPI Status Register – SPSR  
Bit  
7
SPIF  
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SPI2X  
R/W  
0
$0E ($2E)  
WCOL  
SPSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
• Bit 7 SPIF: SPI Interrupt Flag  
When a serial transfer is complete, the SPIF bit is set (one) and an interrupt is gener-  
ated if SPIE in SPCR is set (one) and global interrupts are enabled. If SS is an input and  
is driven low when the SPI is in Master mode, this will also set the SPIF Flag. SPIF is  
cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector. Alter-  
natively, the SPIF bit is cleared by first reading the SPI Status Register with SPIF set  
(one), then by accessing the SPI Data Register (SPDR).  
• Bit 6 WCOL: Write Collision Flag  
The WCOL bit is set if the SPI Data Register (SPDR) is written during a data transfer.  
The WCOL bit (and the SPIF bit) are cleared (zero) by first reading the SPI Status Reg-  
ister with WCOL set (one), and then by accessing the SPI Data Register.  
• Bits 5..1 Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 0 SPI2X: Double SPI Speed Bit  
When this bit is set (one), the SPI speed (SCK frequency) will be doubled when the SPI  
is in Master mode (see Table 23). This means that the maximum SCK period will be two  
CPU clock periods. When the SPI is configured as Slave, the SPI is only guaranteed to  
work at fcl/4.  
The SPI interface on the ATmega161 is also used for Program memory and EEPROM  
downloading or uploading. See page 125 for serial programming and verification.  
67  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
SPI Data Register – SPDR  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
x
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$0F ($2F)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
x
SPDR  
R/W  
x
R/W  
x
R/W  
x
R/W  
x
R/W  
x
R/W  
x
Undefined  
The SPI Data Register is a read/write register used for data transfer between the Regis-  
ter File and the SPI Shift Register. Writing to the register initiates data transmission.  
Reading the register causes the Shift Register Receive buffer to be read.  
68  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
UARTs  
The ATmega161 features two full-duplex (separate Receive and Transmit Registers)  
Universal Asynchronous Receiver and Transmitters (UARTs). The main features are:  
Baud Rate Generator Generates any Baud Rate  
High Baud Rates at low XTAL Frequencies  
8 or 9 Bits Data  
Noise Filtering  
Overrun Detection  
Framing Error Detection  
False Start Bit Detection  
Three Separate Interrupts on TX Complete, TX Data Register Empty, and RX Complete  
Multi-processor Communication Mode  
Double-speed UART Mode  
Data Transmission  
A block schematic of the UART Transmitter is shown in Figure 44. The two UARTs are  
identical and the functionality is described in general for the two UARTs.  
Figure 44. UART Transmitter  
DATA BUS  
BAUD x 16  
UART I/O DATA  
REGISTER (UDRn)  
BAUD RATE  
GENERATOR  
/16  
XTAL  
STORE UDRn  
SHIFT ENABLE  
PIN CONTROL  
LOGIC  
TXDn  
BAUD  
10(11)-BIT TX  
SHIFT REGISTER  
PD1/  
PB3  
CONTROL LOGIC  
IDLE  
UART CONTROL AND  
STATUS REGISTER  
(UCSRnB)  
UART CONTROL AND  
STATUS REGISTER  
(UCSRnA)  
DATA BUS  
TXCn  
IRQ  
UDREn  
IRQ  
n = 0,1  
Data transmission is initiated by writing the data to be transmitted to the UART I/O Data  
Register, UDRn. Data is transferred from UDRn to the Transmit Shift Register when:  
A new character has been written to UDRn after the stop bit from the previous  
character has been shifted out. The Shift Register is loaded immediately.  
69  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
A new character has been written to UDRn before the stop bit from the previous  
character has been shifted out. The Shift Register is loaded when the stop bit of the  
character currently being transmitted has been shifted out.  
If the 10(11)-bit Transmit Shift Register is empty, data is transferred from UDRn to the  
Shift Register. At this time the UDREn (UART Data Register Empty) bit in the UART  
Control and Status Register, UCSRnA, is set. When this bit is set (one), the UART is  
ready to receive the next character. At the same time as the data is transferred from  
UDRn to the 10(11)-bit Shift Register, bit 0 of the Shift Register is cleared (start bit) and  
bit 9 or 10 is set (stop bit). If 9-bit data word is selected (the CHR9n bit in the UART  
Control and Status Register, UCSRnB, is set), the TXB8 bit in UCSRnB is transferred to  
bit 9 in the Transmit Shift Register.  
On the baud rate clock following the transfer operation to the Shift Register, the start bit  
is shifted out on the TXDn pin. Then follows the data, LSB first. When the stop bit has  
been shifted out, the Shift Register is loaded if any new data has been written to the  
UDRn during the transmission. During loading, UDREn is set. If there is no new data in  
the UDRn Register to send when the stop bit is shifted out, the UDREn Flag will remain  
set until UDRn is written again. When no new data has been written and the stop bit has  
been present on TXDn for one bit length, the TX Complete Flag (TXCn) in UCSRnA  
is set.  
The TXENn bit in UCSRnB enables the UART Transmitter when set (one). When this bit  
is cleared (zero), the PD1 (UART0) or PB3 (UART1) pin can be used for general I/O.  
When TXENn is set, the UART Transmitter will be connected to PD1 (UART0) or PB3  
(UART1), which is forced to be an output pin regardless of the setting of the DDD1 bit in  
DDRD (UART0) or DDB3 in DDRB (UART1). Note that PB3 (UART1) also is used as  
one of the input pins to the Analog Comparator. It is therefore not recommended to use  
UART1 if the Analog Comparator is also used in the application at the same time.  
70  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Data Reception  
Figure 45 shows a block diagram of the UART Receiver.  
Figure 45. UART Receiver  
DATA BUS  
UART I/O DATA  
REGISTER (UDRn)  
BAUD x 16  
BAUD  
BAUD RATE  
GENERATOR  
/16  
XTAL  
STORE UDRn  
PIN CONTROL  
LOGIC  
RXDn  
10(11)-BIT RX  
SHIFT REGISTER  
PD0/  
PB2  
DATA RECOVERY  
LOGIC  
UART CONTROL AND  
STATUS REGISTER  
(UCSRnB)  
UART CONTROL AND  
STATUS REGISTER  
(UCSRnA)  
DATA BUS  
RXCn  
IRQ  
n = 0,1  
The Receiver front-end logic samples the signal on the RXDn pin at a frequency 16  
times the baud rate. While the line is idle, one single sample of logical “0” will be inter-  
preted as the falling edge of a start bit, and the start bit detection sequence is initiated.  
Let sample 1 denote the first zero-sample. Following the 1-to-0 transition, the Receiver  
samples the RXDn pin at samples 8, 9 and 10. If two or more of these three samples are  
found to be logical “1”s, the start bit is rejected as a noise spike and the Receiver starts  
looking for the next 1-to-0 transition.  
If, however, a valid start bit is detected, sampling of the data bits following the start bit is  
performed. These bits are also sampled at samples 8, 9 and 10. The logical value found  
in at least two of the three samples is taken as the bit value. All bits are shifted into the  
Transmitter Shift Register as they are sampled. Sampling of an incoming character is  
shown in Figure 46. Note that the description above is not valid when the UART trans-  
mission speed is doubled. See “Double-speed Transmission” on page 78 for a detailed  
description.  
71  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Figure 46. Sampling Received Data(1)  
Note:  
1. This figure is not valid when the UART speed is doubled. See “Double-speed  
Transmission” on page 78 for a detailed description.  
When the stop bit enters the Receiver, the majority of the three samples must be one to  
accept the stop bit. If two or more samples are logical “0”s, the Framing Error (FEn) Flag  
in the UART Control and Status Register (UCSRnA) is set. Before reading the UDRn  
Register, the user should always check the FEn bit to detect framing errors.  
Whether or not a valid stop bit is detected at the end of a character reception cycle, the  
data is transferred to UDRn and the RXCn Flag in UCSRnA is set. UDRn is in fact two  
physically separate registers, one for transmitted data and one for received data. When  
UDRn is read, the Receive Data Register is accessed, and when UDRn is written, the  
Transmit Data Register is accessed. If 9-bit data word is selected (the CHR9n bit in the  
UART Control and Status Register [UCSRnB] is set), the RXB8n bit in UCSRnB is  
loaded with bit 9 in the Transmit Shift Register when data is transferred to UDRn.  
If, after having received a character, the UDRn Register has not been read since the last  
receive, the OverRun (ORn) Flag in UCSRnB is set. This means that the last data byte  
shifted into the Shift Register could not be transferred to UDRn and has been lost. The  
ORn bit is buffered and is updated when the valid data byte in UDRn is read. Thus, the  
user should always check the ORn bit after reading the UDRn Register in order to detect  
any overruns if the baud rate is high or CPU load is high.  
When the RXEN bit in the UCSRnB Register is cleared (zero), the Receiver is disabled.  
This means that the PD0 pin can be used as a general I/O pin. When RXEN is set, the  
UART Receiver will be connected to PD0 (UART0) or PB2 (UART1), which is forced to  
be an input pin regardless of the setting of the DDD0 in DDRD (UART0) or DDB2 bit in  
DDRB (UART1). When PD0 (UART0) or PB2 (UART1) is forced to input by the UART,  
the PORTD0 (UART0) or PORTB2 (UART1) bit can still be used to control the pull-up  
resistor on the pin.  
Note that PB2 (UART1) also is used as one of the input pins to the Analog Comparator.  
It is therefore not recommended to use UART1 if the Analog Comparator also is used in  
the application at the same time.  
When the CHR9n bit in the UCSRnB Register is set, transmitted and received charac-  
ters are nine bits long plus start and stop bits. The ninth data bit to be transmitted is the  
TXB8n bit in UCSRnB Register. This bit must be set to the wanted value before a trans-  
mission is initiated by writing to the UDRn Register. The ninth data bit received is the  
RXB8n bit in the UCSRnB Register.  
72  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Multi-processor  
Communication Mode  
The Multi-processor Communication mode enables several Slave MCUs to receive data  
from a master MCU. This is done by first decoding an address byte to find out which  
MCU has been addressed. If a particular Slave MCU has been addressed, it will receive  
the following data bytes as normal, while the other Slave MCUs will ignore the data  
bytes until another address byte is received.  
For an MCU to act as a master MCU, it should enter 9-bit transmission mode (CHR9n in  
UCSRnB set). The ninth bit must be one to indicate that an address byte is being trans-  
mitted, and zero to indicate that a data byte is being transmitted.  
For the Slave MCUs, the mechanism appears slightly different for 8-bit and 9-bit recep-  
tion mode. In 8-bit reception mode (CHR9n in UCSRnB cleared), the stop bit is one for  
an address byte and zero for a data byte. In 9-bit reception mode (CHR9n in UCSRnB  
set), the ninth bit is one for an address byte and zero for a data byte, whereas the stop  
bit is always high.  
The following procedure should be used to exchange data in Multi-processor Communi-  
cation mode:  
1. All Slave MCUs are in Multi-processor Communication mode (MPCMn in UCS-  
RnA is set).  
2. The master MCU sends an address byte and all Slaves receive and read this  
byte. In the Slave MCUs, the RXCn Flag in UCSRnA will be set as normal.  
3. Each Slave MCU reads the UDRn Register and determines if it has been  
selected. If so, it clears the MPCMn bit in UCSRnA; otherwise, it waits for the  
next address byte.  
4. For each received data byte, the receiving MCU will set the Receive Complete  
Flag (RXCn in UCSRnA). In 8-bit mode, the receiving MCU will also generate a  
framing error (FEn in UCSRnA set), since the stop bit is zero. The other Slave  
MCUs, which still have the MPCMn bit set, will ignore the data byte. In this case,  
the UDRn Register and the RXCn, FEn, or Flags will not be affected.  
5. After the last byte has been transferred, the process repeats from step 2.  
UART Control  
UART0 I/O Data Register –  
UDR0  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$0C ($2C)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
UDR0  
UDR1  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
UART1 I/O Data Register –  
UDR1  
Bit  
7
MSB  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$03 ($23)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
LSB  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The UDRn Register is actually two physically separate registers sharing the same I/O  
address. When writing to the register, the UART Transmit Data Register is written.  
When reading from UDRn, the UART Receive Data Register is read.  
UART0 Control and Status  
Registers – UCSR0A  
Bit  
7
RXC0  
R
6
TXC0  
R/W  
0
5
4
FE0  
R
3
OR0  
R
2
1
U2X0  
R/W  
0
0
MPCM0  
R/W  
0
$0B ($2B)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
UDRE0  
UCSR0A  
R
1
R
0
0
0
0
73  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
 
 
UART1 Control and Status  
Registers – UCSR1A  
Bit  
7
RXC1  
R
6
TXC1  
R/W  
0
5
4
FE1  
R
3
OR1  
R
2
1
U2X1  
R/W  
0
0
MPCM1  
R/W  
0
$02 ($22)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
UDRE1  
UCSR1A  
R
1
R
0
0
0
0
• Bit 7 RXC0/RXC1: UART Receive Complete  
This bit is set (one) when a received character is transferred from the Receiver Shift  
Register to UDRn. The bit is set regardless of any detected framing errors. When the  
RXCIEn bit in UCSRnB is set, the UART Receive Complete interrupt will be executed  
when RXCn is set (one). RXCn is cleared by reading UDRn. When interrupt-driven data  
reception is used, the UART Receive Complete Interrupt routine must read UDRn in  
order to clear RXCn; otherwise, a new interrupt will occur once the interrupt routine  
terminates.  
• Bit 6 TXC0/TXC1: UART Transmit Complete  
This bit is set (one) when the entire character (including the stop bit) in the Transmit  
Shift Register has been shifted out and no new data has been written to UDRn. This  
Flag is especially useful in half-duplex communications interfaces, where a transmitting  
application must enter Receive mode and free the communications bus immediately  
after completing the transmission.  
When the TXCIEn bit in UCSRnB is set, setting of TXCn causes the UART Transmit  
Complete interrupt to be executed. TXCn is cleared by hardware when executing the  
corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector. Alternatively, the TXCn bit is cleared (zero) by  
writing a logical “1” to the bit.  
• Bit 5 UDRE0/UDRE1: UART Data Register Empty  
This bit is set (one) when a character written to UDRn is transferred to the Transmit Shift  
Register. Setting of this bit indicates that the Transmitter is ready to receive a new char-  
acter for transmission.  
When the UDRIEn bit in UCSRnB is set, the UART Transmit Complete interrupt will be  
executed as long as UDREn is set and the global interrupt enable bit in SREG is set.  
UDREn is cleared by writing UDRn. When interrupt-driven data transmittal is used, the  
UART Data Register Empty Interrupt routine must write UDRn in order to clear UDREn,  
otherwise a new interrupt will occur once the interrupt routine terminates.  
UDREn is set (one) during reset to indicate that the Transmitter is ready.  
• Bit 4 FE0/FE1: Framing Error  
This bit is set if a Framing Error condition is detected, i.e., when the stop bit of an incom-  
ing character is zero.  
The FEn bit is cleared when the stop bit of received data is one.  
• Bit 3 OR0/OR1: OverRun  
This bit is set if an Overrun condition is detected, i.e., when a character already present  
in the UDRn Register is not read before the next character has been shifted into the  
Receiver Shift Register. The ORn bit is buffered, which means that it will be set once the  
valid data still in UDRn is read.  
The ORn bit is cleared (zero) when data is received and transferred to UDRn.  
74  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
• Bit 2 Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is reserved bit in the ATmega161 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 1 U2X0/U2X1: Double the UART Transmission Speed  
When this bit is set (one), the UART speed will be doubled. This means that a bit will be  
transmitted/received in 8 CPU clock periods instead of 16 CPU clock periods. For a  
detailed description, see “Double-speed Transmission” on page 78.  
• Bit 0 MPCM0/MPCM1: Multi-processor Communication Mode  
This bit is used to enter Multi-processor Communication mode. The bit is set when the  
Slave MCU waits for an address byte to be received. When the MCU has been  
addressed, the MCU switches off the MPCMn bit and starts data reception.  
For a detailed description, see “Multi-processor Communication mode”.  
UART0 Control and Status  
Registers – UCSR0B  
Bit  
7
RXCIE0  
R/W  
0
6
TXCIE0  
R/W  
0
5
UDRIE0  
R/W  
0
4
RXEN0  
R/W  
0
3
TXEN0  
R/W  
0
2
CHR90  
R/W  
0
1
0
TXB80  
R/W  
0
$0A ($2A)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
RXB80  
UCSR0B  
UCSR1B  
R
1
UART1 Control and Status  
Registers – UCSR1B  
Bit  
7
RXCIE1  
R/W  
0
6
TXCIE1  
R/W  
0
5
UDRIE1  
R/W  
0
4
RXEN1  
R/W  
0
3
TXEN1  
R/W  
0
2
CHR91  
R/W  
0
1
0
TXB81  
R/W  
0
$01 ($21)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
RXB81  
R
1
• Bit 7 RXCIE0/RXCIE1: RX Complete Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is set (one), a setting of the RXCn bit in UCSRnA will cause the Receive  
Complete interrupt routine to be executed, provided that global interrupts are enabled.  
• Bit 6 TXCIE0/TXCIE1: TX Complete Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is set (one), a setting of the TXCn bit in UCSRnA will cause the Transmit  
Complete interrupt routine to be executed, provided that global interrupts are enabled.  
• Bit 5 UDRIE0/UDREI1: UART Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is set (one), a setting of the UDREn bit in UCSRnA will cause the UART  
Data Register Empty interrupt routine to be executed, provided that global interrupts are  
enabled.  
• Bit 4 RXEN0/RXEN1: Receiver Enable  
This bit enables the UART Receiver when set (one). When the Receiver is disabled, the  
TXCn, ORn and FEn Status Flags cannot become set. If these flags are set, turning off  
RXEN does not cause them to be cleared.  
• Bit 3 TXEN0/TXEN1: Transmitter Enable  
This bit enables the UART Transmitter when set (one). When disabling the Transmitter  
while transmitting a character, the Transmitter is not disabled before the character in the  
Shift Register plus any following character in UDRn has been completely transmitted.  
75  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
• Bit 2 CHR90/CHR91: 9-bit Characters  
When this bit is set (one), transmitted and received characters are nine bits long, plus  
start and stop bits. The ninth bit is read and written by using the RXB8n and TXB8 bits in  
UCSRnB, respectively. The ninth data bit can be used as an extra stop bit or a parity bit.  
• Bit 1 RXB80/RXB81: Receive Data Bit 8  
When CHR9n is set (one), RXB8n is the ninth data bit of the received character.  
• Bit 0 TXB80/TXB81: Transmit Data Bit 8  
When CHR9n is set (one), TXB8n is the ninth data bit in the character to be transmitted.  
Baud Rate Generator  
The baud rate generator is a frequency divider that generates baud rates according to  
the following equation:  
f
CK  
BAUD =  
---------------------------------  
16(UBR + 1)  
BAUD = Baud rate  
CK= Crystal clock frequency  
f
UBR = Contents of the UBRRH and UBRR Registers (0 - 4095)  
Note that this equation is not valid when the UART transmission speed is doubled.  
See “Double-speed Transmission” for a detailed description.  
For standard crystal frequencies, the most commonly used baud rates can be generated  
by using the UBR settings in Table 24. UBR values that yield an actual baud rate differ-  
ing less than 2% from the target baud rate are boldface in the table. However, using  
baud rates that have more than 1% error is not recommended. High error ratings give  
less noise resistance.  
76  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 24. UBR Settings at Various Crystal Frequencies  
Baud Rate  
2400  
%Error  
0.2  
%Error  
0.0  
%Error  
UBR=  
0.2  
%Error  
0.0  
1 MHz  
1.8432 MHz  
2 MHz  
2.4576 MHz  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
25  
12  
6
3
2
1
1
0
0
47  
23  
11  
7
51  
63  
31  
15  
10  
7
4
3
2
1
UBR=  
UBR=  
4800  
9600  
0.2  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
33.3 UBR=  
25  
12  
8
6
3
2
1
1
0
0.2  
0.2  
0.0  
0.0  
3.1  
0.0  
6.3  
0.0  
12.5  
0.0  
25.0  
7.5 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
22.9 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
22.9 UBR=  
84.3 UBR=  
3.7 UBR=  
7.5 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
22.9 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
14400  
19200  
28800  
38400  
57600  
76800  
115200  
5
3
2
1
1
0
0
UBR=  
0
0.0  
Baud Rate  
2400  
%Error  
%Error  
0.0  
%Error  
%Error  
0.0  
3.2768 MHz  
3.6864 MHz  
4 MHz  
4.608 MHz  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
84  
42  
20  
13  
10  
6
4
3
2
1
0.4  
0.8  
1.6  
1.6  
95  
47  
23  
15  
11  
7
103  
51  
25  
16  
12  
8
6
3
2
1
0.2  
0.2  
0.2  
119  
59  
29  
19  
14  
9
4800  
9600  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
6.7  
0.0  
6.7  
2.1 UBR=  
UBR=  
14400  
19200  
28800  
38400  
57600  
76800  
115200  
3.1 UBR=  
UBR=  
0.2  
3.7 UBR=  
7.5 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
1.6  
6.3 UBR=  
12.5 UBR=  
12.5 UBR=  
12.5 UBR=  
7
4
3
2
5
3
2
1
20.0  
0.0  
Baud Rate  
2400  
%Error  
%Error  
0.2  
%Error  
0.0  
%Error  
-
7.3728 MHz  
8 MHz  
9.216 MHz  
11.059 MHz  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
287  
143  
71  
47  
35  
23  
17  
11  
8
191  
95  
47  
31  
23  
15  
11  
7
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
207  
103  
51  
34  
25  
16  
12  
8
239  
119  
59  
39  
29  
19  
14  
9
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
UBR=  
4800  
9600  
0.2  
0.2  
0.8  
0.2  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
14400  
19200  
28800  
38400  
57600  
76800  
115200  
2.1 UBR=  
UBR=  
0.2  
3.7 UBR=  
7.5 UBR=  
7.8 UBR=  
6
3
7
4
6.7 UBR=  
UBR=  
5
3
0.0  
5
77  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
UART0 and UART1 High Byte  
Baud Rate Register UBRRHI  
Bit  
7
MSB1  
R/W  
0
6
5
4
LSB1  
R/W  
0
3
MSB0  
R/W  
0
2
1
0
LSB0  
R/W  
0
$20 ($40)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
UBRRHI  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The UART Baud Register is a 12-bit register. The four most significant bits are located in  
a separate register, UBRRHI. Note that both UART0 and UART1 share this register. Bit  
7 to bit 4 of UBRRHI contain the four most significant bits of the UART1 Baud Register.  
Bit 3 to bit 0 contain the four most significant bits of the UART0 Baud Register.  
UART0 Baud Rate Register  
Low Byte – UBRR0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$09 ($29)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
MSB  
R/W  
0
LSB  
R/W  
0
UBRR0  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
UART1 Baud Rate Register  
Low Byte – UBRR1  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
$00 ($20)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
MSB  
R/W  
0
LSB  
R/W  
0
UBRR1  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
UBRRn stores the eight least significant bits of the UART Baud Rate Register.  
Double-speed  
Transmission  
The ATmega161 provides a separate UART mode that allows the user to double the  
communication speed. By setting the U2X bit in UART Control and Status Register  
UCSRnA, the UART speed will be doubled. The data reception will differ slightly from  
Normal mode. Since the speed is doubled, the Receiver front-end logic samples the sig-  
nals on RXDn pin at a frequency 8 times the baud rate. While the line is idle, one single  
sample of logical “0” will be interpreted as the falling edge of a start bit, and the start bit  
detection sequence is initiated. Let sample 1 denote the first zero-sample. Following the  
1-to-0 transition, the Receiver samples the RXDn pin at samples 4, 5 and 6. If two or  
more of these three samples are found to be logical “1”s, the start bit is rejected as a  
noise spike and the Receiver starts looking for the next 1-to-0 transition.  
If, however, a valid start bit is detected, sampling of the data bits following the start bit is  
performed. These bits are also sampled at samples 4, 5 and 6. The logical value found  
in at least two of the three samples is taken as the bit value. All bits are shifted into the  
Transmitter Shift Register as they are sampled. Sampling of an incoming character is  
shown in Figure 47.  
Figure 47. Sampling Received Data when the Transmission Speed is Doubled  
RXD  
START BIT  
D0  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
STOP BIT  
RECEIVER  
SAMPLING  
78  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
The Baud Rate Generator in  
Double UART Speed Mode  
Note that the baud rate equation is different from the equation on page 76 when the  
UART speed is doubled:  
f
CK  
BAUD = ------------------------------  
8(UBR + 1)  
BAUD = Baud rate  
CK= Crystal Clock frequency  
f
UBR = Contents of the UBRRHI and UBRR Registers (0 - 4095)  
Note that this equation is only valid when the UART transmission speed is doubled.  
For standard crystal frequencies, the most commonly used baud rates can be generated  
by using the UBR settings in Table 24. UBR values that yield an actual baud rate differ-  
ing less than 1.5% from the target baud rate are boldface in the table. However, since  
the number of samples are reduced and the system clock might have some variance  
(this applies especially when using resonators), it is recommended that the baud rate  
error be less than 0.5%.  
79  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Table 25. UBR Settings at Various Crystal Frequencies in Double-speed Mode  
Baud Rate  
1.0000 MHz  
% Error  
1.8432 MHz  
% Error  
2.0000 MHz  
% Error  
2400  
UBR = 51  
UBR = 25  
UBR = 12  
UBR = 8  
UBR = 6  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 2  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
-
0.2  
0.2  
0.2  
3.7  
7.5  
7.8  
7.8  
7.8  
22.9  
84.3  
-
UBR = 95  
UBR = 47  
UBR = 23  
UBR = 15  
UBR = 11  
UBR = 7  
UBR = 5  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 2  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
UBR = 103  
UBR = 51  
UBR = 25  
UBR = 16  
UBR = 12  
UBR = 8  
UBR = 6  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 2  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
0.2  
0.2  
0.2  
2.1  
0.2  
3.7  
7.5  
7.8  
7.8  
7.8  
84.3  
4800  
9600  
14400  
19200  
28800  
38400  
57600  
76800  
115200  
230400  
Baud Rate  
3.2768 MHz  
% Error  
3.6864 MHz  
% Error  
4.0000 MHz  
% Error  
2400  
UBR = 170  
UBR = 84  
UBR = 42  
UBR = 27  
UBR = 20  
UBR = 13  
UBR = 10  
UBR = 6  
UBR = 4  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
-
0.2  
0.4  
0.8  
1.6  
1.6  
1.6  
3.1  
1.6  
6.2  
12.5  
12.5  
12.5  
-
UBR = 191  
UBR = 95  
UBR = 47  
UBR = 31  
UBR = 23  
UBR = 15  
UBR = 11  
UBR = 7  
UBR = 5  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
-
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
-
UBR = 207  
UBR = 103  
UBR = 51  
UBR = 34  
UBR = 25  
UBR = 16  
UBR = 12  
UBR = 8  
0.2  
0.2  
0.2  
0.8  
0.2  
2.1  
0.2  
3.7  
7.5  
7.8  
7.8  
7.8  
84.3  
4800  
9600  
14400  
19200  
28800  
38400  
57600  
76800  
115200  
230400  
460800  
912600  
UBR = 6  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 0  
UBR = 0  
Baud Rate  
7.3728 MHz  
% Error  
8.0000 MHz  
% Error  
9.2160 MHz  
% Error  
2400  
UBR = 383  
UBR = 191  
UBR = 95  
UBR = 63  
UBR = 47  
UBR = 31  
UBR = 23  
UBR = 15  
UBR = 11  
UBR = 7  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
UBR = 416  
UBR = 207  
UBR = 103  
UBR = 68  
UBR = 51  
UBR = 34  
UBR = 25  
UBR = 16  
UBR = 12  
UBR = 8  
0.1  
0.2  
0.2  
0.6  
0.2  
0.8  
0.2  
2.1  
0.2  
3.7  
7.8  
7.8  
7.8  
UBR = 479  
UBR = 239  
UBR = 119  
UBR = 79  
UBR = 59  
UBR = 39  
UBR = 29  
UBR = 19  
UBR = 14  
UBR = 9  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
20.0  
20.0  
4800  
9600  
14400  
19200  
28800  
38400  
57600  
76800  
115200  
230400  
460800  
912600  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 3  
UBR = 4  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 1  
UBR = 2  
UBR = 0  
UBR = 0  
UBR = 0  
80  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Analog Comparator  
The Analog Comparator compares the input values on the positive input PB2 (AIN0) and  
negative input PB3 (AIN1). When the voltage on the positive input PB2 (AIN0) is higher  
than the voltage on the negative input PB3 (AIN1), the Analog Comparator Output  
(ACO) is set (one). The comparator’s output can be set to trigger the Timer/Counter1  
Input Capture function. In addition, the comparator can trigger a separate interrupt,  
exclusive to the Analog Comparator. The user can select interrupt triggering on compar-  
ator output rise, fall or toggle. A block diagram of the comparator and its surrounding  
logic is shown in Figure 48.  
Figure 48. Analog Comparator Block Diagram  
Analog Comparator Control  
and Status Register – ACSR  
Bit  
7
6
AINBG  
R/W  
0
5
ACO  
R
4
ACI  
R/W  
0
3
ACIE  
R/W  
0
2
ACIC  
R/W  
0
1
ACIS1  
R/W  
0
0
ACIS0  
R/W  
0
$08 ($28)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
ACD  
R/W  
0
ACSR  
N/A  
• Bit 7 ACD: Analog Comparator Disable  
When this bit is set (one), the power to the Analog Comparator is switched off. This bit  
can be set at any time to turn off the Analog Comparator. This will reduce power con-  
sumption in active and Idle mode. When changing the ACD bit, the Analog Comparator  
Interrupt must be disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise, an interrupt can  
occur when the bit is changed.  
• Bit 6 AINBG: Analog Comparator Bandgap Select  
When this bit is set, a fixed bandgap voltage of 1.22 0.05V replaces the normal input  
to the positive input (AIN0) of the comparator. When this bit is cleared, the normal input  
pin PB2 is applied to the positive input of the comparator.  
• Bit 5 ACO: Analog Comparator Output  
ACO is directly connected to the comparator output.  
81  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
• Bit 4 ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set (one) when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined  
by ACI1 and ACI0. The Analog Comparator Interrupt routine is executed if the ACIE bit  
is set (one) and the I-bit in SREG is set (one). ACI is cleared by hardware when execut-  
ing the corresponding Interrupt Handling Vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by writing  
a logical “1” to the Flag.  
• Bit 3 ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable  
When the ACIE bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register is set (one), the Ana-  
log Comparator Interrupt is enabled. When cleared (zero), the interrupt is disabled.  
• Bit 2 ACIC: Analog Comparator Input Capture Enable  
When set (one), this bit enables the Input Capture function in Timer/Counter1 to be trig-  
gered by the Analog Comparator. The comparator output is, in this case, directly  
connected to the Input Capture front-end logic, making the comparator utilize the noise  
canceler and edge select features of the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture Interrupt. When  
cleared (zero), no connection between the Analog Comparator and the Input Capture  
function is given. To make the comparator trigger the Timer/Counter1 Input Capture  
Interrupt, the TICIE1 bit in the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK) must be set (one).  
• Bits 1, 0 ACIS1, ACIS0: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select  
These bits determine which comparator events trigger the Analog Comparator Interrupt.  
The different settings are shown in Table 26.  
Table 26. ACIS1/ACIS0 Settings(1)  
ACIS1  
ACIS0  
Interrupt Mode  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Comparator Interrupt on Output Toggle  
Reserved  
Comparator Interrupt on Falling Output Edge  
Comparator Interrupt on Rising Output Edge  
Note:  
1. When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the Analog Comparator Interrupt must be dis-  
abled by clearing its Interrupt Enable bit in the ACSR Register. Otherwise, an  
interrupt can occur when the bits are changed.  
Caution: Using the SBI or CBI instruction on bits other than ACI in this register will write  
a one back into ACI if it is read as set, thus clearing the Flag.  
The Analog Comparator pins (PB2 and PB3) are also used as the TXD1 and RXD1 pins  
for UART1. Note that if the UART1 transceiver or Receiver is enabled, the UART1 will  
override the settings in the DDRB Register even if the Analog Comparator is enabled.  
Therefore, it is not recommended to use UART1 if the Analog Comparator is needed in  
the same application at the same time. See “UARTs” on page 69 for more details.  
82  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Internal Voltage  
Reference  
ATmega161 features an internal voltage reference with a nominal voltage of 1.22V. This  
reference can be used as an input to the Analog Comparator.  
Voltage Reference  
Enable Signals and Start-  
up Time  
The voltage reference has a start-up time that may have an influence on the way it  
should be used. The maximum start-up time is TBD. To save power, the reference is on  
only when the AINBG bit in ACSR is set. Thus the user must always allow the reference  
to start up before the output from the Analog Comparator is used. The bandgap refer-  
ence uses approximately 10 µA, and to reduce the power consumption in Power-down  
mode, the user can turn off the reference when entering this mode.  
83  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
Interface to External  
Memory  
With all the features the external memory interface provides, it is well suited to operate  
as an interface to memory devices such as external SRAM and Flash, and peripherals  
such as LCD display, A/D, D/A, etc. The control bits for the external memory interface  
are located in two registers, the MCU Control Register (MCUCR) and the Extended  
MCU Control Register (EMCUCR).  
MCU Control Register –  
MCUCR  
Bit  
7
6
SRW10  
R/W  
0
5
SE  
R/W  
0
4
3
ISC11  
R/W  
0
2
ISC10  
R/W  
0
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
$35 ($55)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
SRE  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
MCUCR  
Extended MCU Control  
Register – EMCUCR  
Bit  
7
6
SRL2  
R/W  
0
5
SRL1  
R/W  
0
4
SRL0  
R/W  
0
3
SRW01  
R/W  
0
2
SRW00  
R/W  
0
1
SRW11  
R/W  
0
0
ISC20  
R/W  
0
$36 ($56)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
SM0  
R/W  
0
EMCUCR  
• Bit 7 MCUCR – SRE: External SRAM Enable  
When the SRE bit is set (one), the external memory interface is enabled and the pin  
functions AD0 - 7 (Port A), A8 - 15 (Port C), ALE (Port E), WR and RD (Port D) are acti-  
vated as the alternate pin functions. The SRE bit overrides any pin direction settings in  
the respective Data Direction Registers. See Figure 50 through Figure 53 for a descrip-  
tion of the external memory pin functions. When the SRE bit is cleared (zero), the  
external Data memory interface is disabled and the normal pin and data direction set-  
tings are used  
• Bits 6..4 EMCUCR – SRL2, SRL1, SRL0: Wait State Page Limit  
It is possible to configure different wait states for different external memory addresses.  
The external memory address space can be divided into two pages with different wait  
state bits. The SRL2, SRL1 and SRL0 bits select the split of the pages (see Table 28  
and Figure 49). As defaults, the SRL2, SRL1 and SRL0 bits are set to zero and the  
entire external memory address space is treated as one page. When the entire SRAM  
address space is configured as one page, the wait states are configured by the SRW11  
and SRW10 bits.  
• Bit 1 EMCUCR and Bit 6 MCUCR – SRW11, SRW10: Wait State Select Bits for  
Upper Page  
The SRW11 and SRW10 bits control the number of wait states for the upper page of the  
external memory address space (see Table 27). Note that if the SRL2, SRL1, and SRL0  
bits are set to zero, the SRW11 and SRW10 bit settings will define the wait state of the  
entire SRAM address space.  
84  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
• Bits 3..2 EMCUCR – SRW01, SRW00: Wait State Select Bits for Lower Page  
The SRW01 and SRW00 bits control the number of wait states for the lower page of the  
external memory address space (see Table 27).  
Table 27. Wait States(1)  
SRWn1  
SRWn0  
Wait States  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
No wait states  
Wait one cycle during read/write strobe  
Wait two cycles during read/write strobe  
Wait two cycles during read/write and wait one cycle before driving  
out new address  
Note:  
1. n = 0 or 1 (lower/upper page)  
For further details of the timing and wait states of the external memory interface, see  
Figure 50 through Figure 53 for how the setting of the SRW bits affects the timing.  
Table 28. Page Limits with Different Settings of SRL2..0  
SRL2  
SRL1  
SRL0  
Page Limits  
Lower page = N/A  
0
0
0
Upper page = $0460-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$1FFF  
Upper page = $2000-$FFFF  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Lower page = $0460-$4FFF  
Upper page = $4000-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$5FFF  
Upper page = $6000-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$7FFF  
Upper page = $8000-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$9FFF  
Upper page = $A000-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$BFFF  
Upper page = $C000-$FFFF  
Lower page = $0460-$DFFF  
Upper page = $E000-$FFFF  
85  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Figure 49. External Memory with Page Select  
Data Memory  
$0000  
$0460  
Internal memory  
Lower page  
SRW01  
SRW00  
SRL[2..0]  
External Memory  
(0-63K x 8)  
Upper page  
SRW11  
SRW10  
$FFFF  
Figure 50. External Data Memory Cycles without Wait State (SRWn1 = 0 and SRWn0  
=0)(1)  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
XX  
XX  
Address [15..8] Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
XX  
Prev. data  
Address  
Address  
Data/Address [7..0]  
WR  
Data  
Data/Address [7..0] Prev. data  
RD  
XX  
XX  
Note:  
1. SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper page) or SRW01 (lower page), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper  
page) or SRW00 (lower page).  
The ALE pulse in period T4 is only present if the next instruction accesses the RAM  
(internal or external). The Data and Address will only change in T4 if ALE is present  
(the next instruction accesses the RAM).  
86  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 51. External Data Memory Cycles with SRWn1 = 0 and SRWn0 = 1(1)  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T5  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
Prev. addr.  
Address [15..8]  
Data/Address [7..0]  
WR  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
XX  
Prev. data  
Address  
Address  
Prev. data  
Data/Address [7..0]  
RD  
XX  
Data  
XX  
Note:  
1. SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper page) or SRW01 (lower page), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper  
page) or SRW00 (lower page). The ALE pulse in period T5 is only present if the next  
instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). The Data and Address will only  
change in T5 if ALE is present (the next instruction accesses the RAM).  
Figure 52. External Data Memory Cycles with SRWn1 = 1 and SRWn0 = 0(1)  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T6  
T5  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
Address [15..8]  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
XX  
Data/Address [7..0] Prev. data  
Address  
Address  
WR  
Data/Address [7..0] Prev. data  
RD  
Data  
XX  
XX  
Note:  
1. SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper page) or SRW01 (lower page), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper  
page) or SRW00 (lower page). The ALE pulse in period T6 is only present if the next  
instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). The Data and Address will only  
change in T6 if ALE is present (the next instruction accesses the RAM).  
Figure 53. External Data Memory Cycles with SRWn1 = 1 and SRWn0 = 1(1)  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T6  
T7  
T5  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
Address [15..8] Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
XX  
Data/Address [7..0] Prev. data  
Address  
Address  
WR  
Data/Address [7..0] Prev. data  
RD  
XX  
Data  
XX  
Note:  
1. SRWn1 = SRW11 (upper page) or SRW01 (lower page), SRWn0 = SRW10 (upper  
page) or SRW00 (lower page). The ALE pulse in period T7 is only present if the next  
instruction accesses the RAM (internal or external). The Data and Address will only  
change in T7 if ALE is present (the next instruction accesses the RAM).  
87  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Using the External  
Memory Interface  
The interface consists of:  
Port A: multiplexed low-order address bus and data bus  
Port C: high-order address bus  
The ALE pin: address latch enable  
The RD and WR pin: read and write strobes  
The external memory interface is enabled by setting the external SRAM enable bit  
(SRE) of the MCU Control Register (MCUCR) and will override the setting of the Data  
Direction Registers DDRA, DDRD and DDRE. When the SRE bit is cleared (zero), the  
external memory interface is disabled and the normal pin and data direction settings are  
used. When SRE is low, the address space above the internal SRAM boundary is not  
mapped into the internal SRAM, as in AVR parts do not have an external memory  
interface.  
When ALE goes from high to low, there is a valid address on Port A. ALE is low during a  
data transfer. RD and WR are active when accessing the external memory only.  
When the external memory interface is enabled, the ALE signal may have short pulses  
when accessing the internal RAM, but the ALE signal is stable when accessing the  
external memory.  
Figure 54 sketches how to connect an external SRAM to the AVR using eight latches  
that are transparent when G is high.  
Figure 54. External SRAM Connected to the AVR  
D[7:0]  
Port A  
ALE  
D
G
Q
A[7:0]  
SRAM  
A[15:8]  
AVR  
Port C  
RD  
RD  
WR  
WR  
For details on the timing for the SRAM interface, please see Figure 83 through Figure 86  
and Table 51 through Table 58.  
88  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
I/O Ports  
All AVR ports have true read-modify-write functionality when used as general digital I/O  
ports. This means that the direction of one port pin can be changed without unintention-  
ally changing the direction of any other pin with the SBI and CBI instructions. The same  
applies for changing drive value (if configured as output) or enabling/disabling of pull-up  
resistors (if configured as input).  
Port A  
Port A is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port.  
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for the Port A, one each for the Data  
Register – PORTA, $1B($3B), Data Direction Register – DDRA, $1A($3A) and the Port  
A Input Pins – PINA, $19($39). The Port A Input Pins address is read-only, while the  
Data Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
All port pins have individually selectable pull-up resistors. The Port A output buffers can  
sink 20 mA and thus drive LED displays directly. When pins PA0 to PA7 are used as  
inputs and are externally pulled low, they will source current if the internal pull-up resis-  
tors are activated.  
The Port A pins have alternate functions related to the optional external memory inter-  
face. Port A can be configured to be the multiplexed low-order address/data bus during  
accesses to the external Data memory. In this mode, Port A has internal pull-up  
resistors.  
When Port A is set to the alternate function by the SRE (External SRAM Enable) bit in  
the MCUCR (MCU Control Register), the alternate settings override the Data Direction  
Register.  
Port A Data Register – PORTA  
Bit  
7
PORTA7  
R/W  
0
6
PORTA6  
R/W  
0
5
PORTA5  
R/W  
0
4
PORTA4  
R/W  
0
3
PORTA3  
R/W  
0
2
PORTA2  
R/W  
0
1
PORTA1  
R/W  
0
0
PORTA0  
R/W  
0
PORTA  
DDRA  
PINA  
$1B ($3B)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Port A Data Direction Register  
– DDRA  
Bit  
7
DDA7  
R/W  
0
6
DDA6  
R/W  
0
5
DDA5  
R/W  
0
4
DDA4  
R/W  
0
3
DDA3  
R/W  
0
2
DDA2  
R/W  
0
1
DDA1  
R/W  
0
0
DDA0  
R/W  
0
$1A ($3A)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Port A Input Pins Address –  
PINA  
Bit  
7
PINA7  
R
6
PINA6  
R
5
PINA5  
R
4
PINA4  
R
3
PINA3  
R
2
PINA2  
R
1
PINA1  
R
0
PINA0  
R
$19 ($39)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
The Port A Input Pins address (PINA) is not a register; this address enables access to  
the physical value on each Port A pin. When reading PORTA, the Port A Data Latch is  
read and when reading PINA, the logical values present on the pins are read.  
Port A as General Digital I/O  
All eight pins in Port A have equal functionality when used as digital I/O pins.  
PAn, general I/O pin: The DDAn bit in the DDRA Register selects the direction of this  
pin. If DDAn is set (one), PAn is configured as an output pin. If DDAn is cleared (zero),  
PAn is configured as an input pin. If PORTAn is set (one) when the pin is configured as  
an input pin, the MOS pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, the  
PORTAn has to be cleared (zero) or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The  
89  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
 
 
 
Port A pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not  
running.  
Table 29. DDAn Effects on Port A Pins(1)  
DDAn  
PORTAn  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input  
Tri-state (high-Z)  
Input  
Yes  
PAn will source current if ext. pulled low.  
Push-pull Zero Output  
Push-pull One Output  
Output  
Output  
No  
No  
Note:  
1. n: 7,6…0, pin number  
Port A Schematics  
Note that all port pins are synchronized. The synchronization latch is, however, not  
shown in the figure.  
Figure 55. Port A Schematic Diagrams (Pins PA0 - PA7)  
90  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Port B  
Port B is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port.  
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for the Port B, one each for the Data  
Register – PORTB, $18($38), Data Direction Register – DDRB, $17($37) and the Port B  
Input Pins – PINB, $16($36). The Port B Input Pins address is read-only, while the Data  
Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
All port pins have individually selectable pull-up resistors. The Port B output buffers can  
sink 20 mA and thus drive LED displays directly. When pins PB0 to PB7 are used as  
inputs and are externally pulled low, they will source current if the internal pull-up resis-  
tors are activated.  
The Port B pins with alternate functions are shown in Table 30.  
Table 30. Port B Pin Alternate Functions(1)  
Port Pin Alternate Functions  
OC0 (Timer/Counter0 Compare Match Output)/T0 (Timer/Counter0 External  
Counter Input)  
PB0  
OC2 (Timer/Counter2 Compare Match Output)/T1 (Timer/Counter1 External  
Counter Input)  
PB1  
PB2  
PB3  
PB4  
PB5  
PB6  
PB7  
RXD1 (UART1 Input Line)/AIN0 (Analog Comparator Positive Input)  
TXD1 (UART1 Output Line)/AIN1 (Analog Comparator Negative Input)  
SS (SPI Slave Select Input)  
MOSI (SPI Bus Master Output/Slave Input)  
MISO (SPI Bus Master Input/Slave Output)  
SCK (SPI Bus Serial Clock)  
Note:  
1. When the pins are used for the alternate function, the DDRB and PORTB Registers  
have to be set according to the alternate function description.  
Port B Data Register – PORTB  
Bit  
7
PORTB7  
R/W  
0
6
PORTB6  
R/W  
0
5
PORTB5  
R/W  
0
4
PORTB4  
R/W  
0
3
PORTB3  
R/W  
0
2
PORTB2  
R/W  
0
1
PORTB1  
R/W  
0
0
PORTB0  
R/W  
0
PORTB  
DDRB  
PINB  
$18 ($38)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Port B Data Direction Register  
– DDRB  
Bit  
7
DDB7  
R/W  
0
6
DDB6  
R/W  
0
5
DDB5  
R/W  
0
4
DDB4  
R/W  
0
3
DDB3  
R/W  
0
2
DDB2  
R/W  
0
1
DDB1  
R/W  
0
0
DDB0  
R/W  
0
$17 ($37)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Port B Input Pins Address –  
PINB  
Bit  
7
PINB7  
R
6
PINB6  
R
5
PINB5  
R
4
PINB4  
R
3
PINB3  
R
2
PINB2  
R
1
PINB1  
R
0
PINB0  
R
$16 ($36)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
The Port B Input Pins address (PINB) is not a register; this address enables access to  
the physical value on each Port B pin. When reading PORTB, the Port B Data Latch is  
read and when reading PINB, the logical values present on the pins are read.  
91  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
 
 
Port B as General Digital I/O  
All eight pins in Port B have equal functionality when used as digital I/O pins.  
PBn, general I/O pin: The DDBn bit in the DDRB Register selects the direction of this  
pin. If DDBn is set (one), PBn is configured as an output pin. If DDBn is cleared (zero),  
PBn is configured as an input pin. If PORTBn is set (one) when the pin is configured as  
an input pin, the MOS pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, the  
PORTBn has to be cleared (zero) or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The  
Port B pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not  
running.  
Table 31. DDBn Effects on Port B Pins(1)  
DDBn  
PORTBn  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input  
Tri-state (high-Z)  
Input  
Yes  
PBn will source current if ext. pulled low.  
Push-pull Zero Output  
Push-pull One Output  
Output  
Output  
No  
No  
Note:  
1. n: 7,6…0, pin number  
Alternate Functions of Port B The alternate pin configuration is as follows:  
• SCK Port B, Bit 7  
SCK: Master clock output, Slave clock input pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is  
enabled as a Slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB7.  
When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by  
DDB7. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the  
PORTB7 bit. See the description of the SPI port for further details.  
• MISO Port B, Bit 6  
MISO: Master data input, Slave data output pin for SPI channel. When the SPI is  
enabled as a master, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of  
DDB6. When the SPI is enabled as a Slave, the data direction of this pin is controlled by  
DDB6. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the  
PORTB6 bit. See the description of the SPI port for further details.  
• MOSI Port B, Bit 5  
MOSI: SPI Master data output, Slave data input for SPI channel. When the SPI is  
enabled as a Slave, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the setting of DDB5.  
When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is controlled by  
DDB5. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be controlled by the  
PORTB5 bit. See the description of the SPI port for further details.  
• SS Port B, Bit 4  
SS: Slave port select input. When the SPI is enabled as a Slave, this pin is configured  
as an input regardless of the setting of DDB5. As a Slave, the SPI is activated when this  
pin is driven low. When the SPI is enabled as a master, the data direction of this pin is  
controlled by DDB5. When the pin is forced to be an input, the pull-up can still be con-  
trolled by the PORTB5 bit. See the description of the SPI port for further details.  
92  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
• TXD1/AIN1 Port B, Bit 3  
AIN1, Analog Comparator Negative Input. This pin also serves as the negative input of  
the On-chip Analog Comparator.  
TXD1, Transmit Data (Data output pin for the UART1). When the UART1 Transmitter is  
enabled, this pin is configured as an output regardless of the value of DDRB3.  
• RXD1/AIN0 Port B, Bit 2  
AIN0, Analog Comparator Positive Input. This pin also serves as the positive input of the  
On-chip Analog Comparator.  
RXD1, Receive Data (Data input pin for the UART1). When the UART1 Receiver is  
enabled, this pin is configured as an input regardless of the value of DDRB2. When the  
UART1 forces this pin to be an input, a logical “1” in PORTB2 will turn on the internal  
pull-up.  
• OC2/T1 Port B, Bit 1  
T1: Timer/Counter1 counter source. See “Timer/Counter1” on page 49 for further  
details.  
OC2, Output compare match output: The PB1 pin can serve as an external output when  
the Timer/Counter2 compare matches. The PB1 pin has to be configured as an output  
(DDB1 set [one]) to serve this function. See “8-bit Timer/Counters T/C0 and T/C2” on  
page 40 for further details. The OC2 pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer  
function.  
• OC0/T0 Port B, Bit 0  
T0: Timer/Counter0 counter source. See “8-bit Timer/Counters T/C0 and T/C2” on page  
40 further details.  
OC0, Output compare match output: The PB0 pin can serve as an external output when  
the Timer/Counter0 compare matches. The PB0 pin has to be configured as an output  
(DDB0 set [one]) to serve this function. See “8-bit Timer/Counters T/C0 and T/C2” on  
page 40 for further details and how to enable the output. The OC0 pin is also the output  
pin for the PWM mode timer function.  
93  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Port B Schematics  
Note that all port pins are synchronized. The synchronization latches are, however, not  
shown in the figures.  
Figure 56. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pins PB0 and PB1)  
DDBn  
PBn  
PORTBn  
COMx0  
WP: WRITE PORTB  
WD: WRITE DDRB  
COMx1  
RL:  
RP:  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
COMP. MATCH x  
PWMx  
RD: READ DDRB  
n:  
x:  
0,1  
0,2  
FOCx  
CSn2 CSn1 CSn0  
94  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 57. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB2)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
Q
D
DDB2  
C
WD  
RESET  
Q
D
PB2  
PORTB2  
C
RL  
RP  
WP  
RXEN1  
RXD1  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
AIN0  
RXD1: UART1 RECEIVE DATA  
RXEN1: UART1 RECEIVE ENABLE  
AIN0:  
ANALOG COMPARATOR POSITIVE INPUT  
Figure 58. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB3)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
Q
D
DDB3  
C
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PB3  
PORTB3  
C
RL  
RP  
WP  
TXEN1  
TXD1  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
AIN1  
TXD1:  
UART1 TRANSMIT DATA  
TXEN1: UART1 TRANSMIT ENABLE  
AIN1: ANALOG COMPARATOR NEGATIVE INPUT  
95  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Figure 59. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB4)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
Q
D
DDB4  
C
WD  
RESET  
Q
D
PB4  
PORTB4  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
MSTR  
SPE  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
MSTR: SPI MASTER ENABLE  
SPE: SPI ENABLE  
SPI SS  
Figure 60. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB5)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
Q
DDB5  
D
C
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
PORTB5  
D
PB5  
C
RL  
RP  
WP  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
SPI ENABLE  
MASTER SELECT  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
SPE:  
MSTR  
MSTR  
SPE  
SPI MASTER  
OUT  
SPI SLAVE  
IN  
96  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 61. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB6)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
Q
D
DDB6  
C
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PB6  
PORTB6  
C
RL  
RP  
WP  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
SPI ENABLE  
MASTER SELECT  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
SPE:  
MSTR  
MSTR  
SPE  
SPI SLAVE  
OUT  
SPI MASTER  
IN  
Figure 62. Port B Schematic Diagram (Pin PB7)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
DDB7  
C
Q
D
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PB7  
PORTB7  
C
RL  
RP  
WP  
WRITE PORTB  
WRITE DDRB  
READ PORTB LATCH  
READ PORTB PIN  
READ DDRB  
SPI ENABLE  
MASTER SELECT  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
SPE:  
MSTR  
MSTR  
SPE  
SPI ClLOCK  
OUT  
SPI CLOCK  
IN  
97  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Port C  
Port C is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port.  
Three I/O memory address locations are allocated for the Port C, one each for the Data  
Register – PORTC, $15($35), Data Direction Register – DDRC, $14($34) and the Port C  
Input Pins – PINC, $13($33). The Port C Input Pins address is read-only, while the Data  
Register and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
All port pins have individually selectable pull-up resistors. The Port C output buffers can  
sink 20 mA and thus drive LED displays directly. When pins PC0 to PC7 are used as  
inputs and are externally pulled low, they will source current if the internal pull-up resis-  
tors are activated.  
The Port C pins have alternate functions related to the optional external memory inter-  
face. Port C can be configured to be the high-order address byte during accesses to  
external Data memory.  
When Port C is set to the alternate function by the SRE (External SRAM Enable) bit in  
the MCUCR (MCU Control Register), the alternate settings override the Data Direction  
Register.  
Port C Data Register – PORTC  
Bit  
7
PORTC7  
R/W  
0
6
PORTC6  
R/W  
0
5
PORTC5  
R/W  
0
4
PORTC4  
R/W  
0
3
PORTC3  
R/W  
0
2
PORTC2  
R/W  
0
1
PORTC1  
R/W  
0
0
PORTC0  
R/W  
0
PORTC  
DDRC  
PINC  
$15 ($35)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Port C Data Direction Register  
– DDRC  
Bit  
7
DDC7  
R/W  
0
6
DDC6  
R/W  
0
5
DDC5  
R/W  
0
4
DDC4  
R/W  
0
3
DDC3  
R/W  
0
2
DDC2  
R/W  
0
1
DDC1  
R/W  
0
0
DDC0  
R/W  
0
$14 ($34)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Port C Input Pins Address –  
PINC  
Bit  
7
PINC7  
R
6
PINC6  
R
5
PINC5  
R
4
PINC4  
R
3
PINC3  
R
2
PINC2  
R
1
PINC1  
R
0
PINC0  
R
$13 ($33)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
The Port C Input Pins address (PINC) is not a register; this address enables access to  
the physical value on each Port C pin. When reading PORTC, the Port C Data Latch is  
read and when reading PINC, the logical values present on the pins are read.  
Port C as General Digital I/O  
All eight pins in Port C have equal functionality when used as digital I/O pins.  
PCn, general I/O pin: The DDCn bit in the DDRC Register selects the direction of this  
pin. If DDCn is set (one), PCn is configured as an output pin. If DDCn is cleared (zero),  
PCn is configured as an input pin. If PORTCn is set (one) when the pin is configured as  
an input pin, the MOS pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off,  
PORTCn has to be cleared (zero) or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The  
Port C pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not  
running.  
98  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 32. DDCn Effects on Port C Pins(1)  
DDCn  
PORTCn  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input  
Tri-state (high-Z)  
Input  
Yes  
PCn will source current if ext. pulled low  
Push-pull Zero Output  
Output  
Output  
No  
No  
Push-pull One Output  
Note:  
1. n: 7, 6,…0, pin number  
Port C Schematics  
Note that all port pins are synchronized. The synchronization latch is, however, not  
shown in the figure.  
Figure 63. Port C Schematic Diagram (Pins PC0 - PC7)  
99  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Port D  
Port D is an 8-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors.  
Three I/O address locations are allocated for the Port D, one each for the Data Register  
– PORTD, $12($32), Data Direction Register – DDRD, $11($31) and the Port D Input  
Pins – PIND, $10($30). The Port D Input Pins address is read-only, while the Data Reg-  
ister and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
The Port D output buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs, Port D pins that are externally  
pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated.  
Some Port D pins have alternate functions as shown in Table 33.  
Table 33. Port D Pin Alternate Functions  
Port Pin Alternate Function  
PD0  
PD1  
PD2  
PD3  
PD3  
RXD0 (UART0 Input Line)  
TXD0 (UART0 Output Line)  
INT0 (External Interrupt0 Input)  
INT1 (External Interrupt1 Input)  
TOSC1 (RTC Oscillator Timer/Counter2)  
TOSC2 (RTC Oscillator Timer/Counter2)/OC1A (Timer/Counter1 Output  
CompareA Match Output)  
PD5  
PD6  
PD7  
WR (Write Strobe to External Memory)  
RD (Read Strobe to External Memory)  
When the PD5 pin is used for the alternate function (OC1A), the DDRD and PORTD  
Registers have to be set according to the alternate function description.  
Port D Data Register – PORTD  
Bit  
7
PORTD7  
R/W  
0
6
PORTD6  
R/W  
0
5
PORTD5  
R/W  
0
4
PORTD4  
R/W  
0
3
PORTD3  
R/W  
0
2
PORTD2  
R/W  
0
1
PORTD1  
R/W  
0
0
PORTD0  
R/W  
0
PORTD  
DDRD  
PIND  
$12 ($32)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Port D Data Direction Register  
– DDRD  
Bit  
7
DDD7  
R/W  
0
6
DDD6  
R/W  
0
5
DDD5  
R/W  
0
4
DDD4  
R/W  
0
3
DDD3  
R/W  
0
2
DDD2  
R/W  
0
1
DDD1  
R/W  
0
0
DDD0  
R/W  
0
$11 ($31)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Port D Input Pins Address –  
PIND  
Bit  
7
PIND7  
R
6
PIND6  
R
5
PIND5  
R
4
PIND4  
R
3
PIND3  
R
2
PIND2  
R
1
PIND1  
R
0
PIND0  
R
$10 ($30)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
The Port D Input Pins address (PIND) is not a register; this address enables access to  
the physical value on each Port D pin. When reading PORTD, the Port D Data Latch is  
read and when reading PIND, the logical values present on the pins are read.  
Port D as General Digital I/O  
PDn, general I/O pin: The DDDn bit in the DDRD Register selects the direction of this  
pin. If DDDn is set (one), PDn is configured as an output pin. If DDDn is cleared (zero),  
PDn is configured as an input pin. If PORTDn is set (one) when configured as an input  
pin, the MOS pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, the PORTDn  
100  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
has to be cleared (zero) or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The Port D pins  
are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
Table 34. DDDn Bits on Port D Pins(1)  
DDDn  
PORTDn  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input  
Tri-state (high-Z)  
Input  
Yes  
PDn will source current if ext. pulled low.  
Push-pull Zero Output  
Push-pull One Output  
Output  
Output  
No  
No  
Notes: 1. n: 7,6…0, pin number  
Alternate Functions of Port D The alternate pin configuration is as follows:  
• RD Port D, Bit 7  
RD is the external Data memory read control strobe.  
• WR Port D, Bit 6  
WR is the external Data memory write control strobe.  
• OC1 Port D, Bit 5  
OC1, Output compare match output: The PD5 pin can serve as an external output when  
the Timer/Counter1 compare matches. The PD5 pin has to be configured as an output  
(DDD5 set [one]) to serve this function. See “Timer/Counter1” on page 49 for further  
details and how to enable the output. The OC1 pin is also the output pin for the PWM  
mode timer function.  
• TOSC1/TOSC2 Port D, Bits 5 and 4  
When the AS2 bit in ASSR is set (one) to enable asynchronous clocking of  
Timer/Counter2, pins PD5 and PD4 are disconnected from the port. In this mode, a  
crystal Oscillator is connected to the pins and the pins cannot be used as I/O pins.  
• INT1 Port D, Bit 3  
INT1, External Interrupt source 1: The PD3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source  
to the MCU. See “MCU Control Register – MCUCR” on page 34 for further details.  
• INT0 Port D, Bit 2  
INT0, External Interrupt source 0: The PD2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source  
to the MCU. See “MCU Control Register – MCUCR” on page 34 for further details.  
• TXD0 Port D, Bit 1  
Transmit Data (Data output pin for the UART0). When the UART0 Transmitter is  
enabled, this pin is configured as an output regardless of the value of DDRD1.  
• RXD0 Port D, Bit 0  
Receive Data (Data input pin for the UART0). When the UART Receiver is enabled, this  
pin is configured as an input regardless of the value of DDRD0. When the UART0 forces  
this pin to be an input, a logical “1” in PORTD0 will turn on the internal pull-up.  
101  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Port D Schematics  
Note that all port pins are synchronized. The synchronization latches are, however, not  
shown in the figures.  
Figure 64. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD0)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
Q
D
DDD0  
C
WD  
RESET  
Q
D
PD0  
PORTD0  
C
RL  
RP  
WP  
RXEN0  
RXD0  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
WRITE PORTD  
WRITE DDRD  
READ PORTD LATCH  
READ PORTD PIN  
READ DDRD  
RXD0:  
UART0 RECEIVE DATA  
RXEN0: UART0 RECEIVE ENABLE  
Figure 65. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD1)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
DDD1  
C
Q
D
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PD1  
PORTD1  
C
RL  
RP  
WP  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
WRITE PORTD  
WRITE DDRD  
READ PORTD LATCH  
READ PORTD PIN  
READ DDRD  
TXEN0  
TXD0  
TXD0:  
UART0 TRANSMIT DATA  
TXEN0: UART0 TRANSMIT ENABLE  
102  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 66. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pins PD2 and PD3)  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
n:  
WRITE PORTD  
WRITE DDRD  
READ PORTD LATCH  
READ PORTD PIN  
READ DDRD  
2, 3  
m:  
0, 1  
Figure 67. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD4)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
Q
D
DDD4  
C
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PD4  
PORTD4  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
WP: WRITE PORTD  
WD: WRITE DDRD  
AS2  
RL: READ PORTD LATCH  
RP: READ PORTD PIN  
RD: READ DDRD  
T/C2 OSC  
AMP INPUT  
AS2: ASYNCH SELECT T/C2  
103  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Figure 68. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD5)  
COMP. MATCH 1A  
PWM10  
PWM11  
FOC1A  
WP:  
WD:  
RL:  
RP:  
RD:  
AS2  
WRITE PORTD  
WRITE DDRD  
READ PORTD LATCH  
READ PORTD PIN  
READ DDRD  
ASYNCH SELECT T/C2  
Figure 69. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD6)  
WP: WRITE PORTD  
WD: WRITE DDRD  
RL: READ PORTD LATCH  
RP: READ PORTD PIN  
RD: READ DDRD  
WE: WRITE ENABLE  
SRE: EXTERNAL SRAM ENABLE  
104  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 70. Port D Schematic Diagram (Pin PD7)  
WP: WRITE PORTD  
WD: WRITE DDRD  
RL: READ PORTD LATCH  
RP: READ PORTD PIN  
RD: READ DDRD  
RE: READ ENABLE  
SRE: EXTERNAL SRAM ENABLE  
105  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Port E  
Port E is a 3-bit bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors.  
Three I/O address locations are allocated for the Port E, one each for the Data Register  
– PORTE, $07($27), Data Direction Register – DDRE, $06($26) and the Port E Input  
Pins – PINE, $05($25). The Port E Input Pins address is read-only, while the Data Reg-  
ister and the Data Direction Register are read/write.  
The Port E output buffers can sink 20 mA. As inputs, Port E pins that are externally  
pulled low will source current if the pull-up resistors are activated.  
Port E pins have alternate functions as shown in Table 35.  
Table 35. Port E Pin Alternate Functions(1)  
Port Pin  
PE0  
Alternate Function  
ICP (Input Capture Pin Timer/Counter1)/INT2 (External Interrupt 2 Input)  
OC1B (Timer/Counter1 Output CompareB Match Output)  
ALE (Address Latch Enable, External Memory)  
PE1  
PE2  
Note:  
1. When the PE1 pin is used for the alternate function, the DDRE and PORTE Registers  
have to be set according to the alternate function description.  
Port E Data Register – PORTE  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
PORTE2  
R/W  
0
1
PORTE1  
R/W  
0
0
PORTE0  
R/W  
0
PORTE  
DDRE  
PINE  
$07 ($27)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
Port E Data Direction Register  
– DDRE  
Bit  
7
R
0
6
R
0
5
R
0
4
R
0
3
R
0
2
1
0
$06 ($26)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
DDE2  
R/W  
0
DDE1  
R/W  
0
DDE0  
R/W  
0
Port E Input Pins Address –  
PINE  
Bit  
7
R
0
6
R
0
5
R
0
4
R
0
3
R
0
2
1
0
$05 ($25)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
PINE2  
R
PINE1  
R
PINE0  
R
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
The Port E Input Pins address (PINE) is not a register; this address enables access to  
the physical value on each Port E pin. When reading PORTE, the Port E Data Latch is  
read and when reading PINE, the logical values present on the pins are read.  
Port E as General Digital I/O  
PEn, general I/O pin: The DDEn bit in the DDRE Register selects the direction of this  
pin. If DDEn is set (one), PEn is configured as an output pin. If DDEn is cleared (zero),  
PEn is configured as an input pin. If PORTEn is set (one) when configured as an input  
pin, the MOS pull-up resistor is activated. To switch the pull-up resistor off, the PORTEn  
has to be cleared (zero) or the pin has to be configured as an output pin. The Port E pins  
are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
106  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 36. DDEn Bits on Port E Pins(1)  
DDEn  
PORTEn  
I/O  
Pull-up  
No  
Comment  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Input  
Tri-state (high-Z)  
Input  
Yes  
PEn will source current if ext. pulled low.  
Push-pull Zero Output  
Output  
Output  
No  
No  
Push-pull One Output  
Note:  
1. n: 2,1,0, pin number.  
Alternate Functions of Port E  
The alternate pin configuration is as follows:  
• OC1B Port E, Bit 2  
OC1B, Output compare match output: The PE2 pin can serve as an external output  
when the Timer/Counter1 compare matches. The PE2 pin has to be configured as an  
output (DDE2 set [one]) to serve this function. See “Timer/Counter1” on page 49 for fur-  
ther details. The OC1B pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function.  
• ALE Port E, Bit 1  
ALE: When the External Memory is enabled, the PE1 pin serves as the Dress Latch  
Enable. Note that enabling of External Memory will override both the direction and port  
value. See “Interface to External Memory” on page 84 for a detailed description.  
• ICP/INT2 Port E, Bit 0  
ICP, Input Capture pin: The PE0 pin can serve as the Input Capture source for  
Timer/Counter 1. See page 54 for a detailed description.  
INT2, External Interrupt source 2: The PE0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source  
to the MCU. See “Extended MCU Control Register – EMCUCR” on page 36 for further  
details.  
107  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Port E Schematics  
Figure 71. Port E Schematic Diagram (Pin PE0)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
DDE0  
C
Q
D
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PE0  
PORTE0  
C
RL  
WP  
RP  
WP: WRITE PORTE  
WD: WRITE DDRE  
0
1
NOISE CANCELER  
ICNC1  
EDGE SELECT  
ICES1  
ICF1  
RL:  
RP:  
READ PORTE LATCH  
READ PORTE PIN  
RD: READ DDRE  
ACIC: COMPARATOR IC ENABLE  
ACO: COMPARATOR OUTPUT  
ACIC  
ACO  
'1'  
INT2  
Q
D
PORTE0  
C
R
HW CLEAR  
SW CLEAR  
ISC2  
Figure 72. Port E Schematic Diagram (Pin PE1)  
RD  
MOS  
PULL-  
UP  
RESET  
R
DDE1  
C
Q
D
WD  
RESET  
R
Q
D
PORTE1  
C
PE1  
RL  
WP  
RP  
WP: WRITE PORTE  
WD: WRITE DDRE  
SRE  
ALE  
RL:  
RP:  
READ PORTE LATCH  
READ PORTE PIN  
RD: READ DDRE  
SRE: XRAM ENABLE  
ALE: ALE PULSE FROM XRAM  
108  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 73. Port E Schematic Diagram (Pin PE2)  
DDE2  
PE2  
PORTE2  
COM1B0  
COM1B1  
WP: WRITE PORTE  
WD: WRITE DDRE  
RL:  
RP:  
READ PORTE LATCH  
READ PORTE PIN  
COMP. MATCH 1B  
RD: READ DDRE  
PWM10  
PWM11  
FOC1B  
109  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Memory  
Programming  
Boot Loader Support  
The ATmega161 provides a mechanism for downloading and uploading program code  
by the MCU itself. This feature allows flexible application software updates, controlled  
by the MCU using a Flash-resident Boot Loader program.  
The ATmega161 Flash memory is organized in two main sections:  
1. The Application Code section (address $0000 - $1DFF)  
2. The Boot Loader section/Boot block (address $1E00 - $1FFF)  
Figure 74. Memory Sections  
Program Memory  
$0000  
Application Code section  
(7.5K x 16)  
$1DFF  
$1E00  
Boot Loader section  
(512 x 16)  
$1FFF  
The Boot Loader program can use any available data interface and associated protocol,  
such as UART serial bus interface, to input or output program code and write (program)  
that code into the Flash memory or read the code from the Program memory.  
The program Flash memory is divided into pages that each contain 128 bytes. The Boot  
Loader Flash section occupies eight pages from $1E00 to $1FFF by 16-bit words.  
The Store Program Memory (SPM) instruction can access the entire Flash, but it can  
only be executed from the Boot Loader Flash section. If no Boot Loader capability is  
needed, the entire Flash is available for application code. The ATmega161 has two sep-  
arate sets of Boot Lock bits that can be set independently. This gives the user a unique  
flexibility to select different levels of protection. The user can elect to:  
110  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
• Protect the entire Flash from a software update by the Boot Loader program  
• Only protect the Boot Loader section from a software update by the Boot Loader  
program  
• Only protect the Application Code section from a software update by the Boot Loader  
program  
• Allow software update in the entire Flash  
See Table 37 and Table 38 for further details. The Boot Lock bits can be set in software  
and in Serial or Parallel Programming mode, but they can only be cleared by a Chip  
Erase command.  
Table 37. Boot Lock Bit0 Protection Modes (Application Code Section)(1)  
BLB0 Mode BLB02 BLB01 Protection  
No restrictions for SPM, LPM accessing Application Code  
section  
1
2
1
1
1
0
SPM is not allowed to write to the Application Code  
section.  
SPM is not allowed to write to the Application Code  
section, and LPM executing from the Boot Loader section  
is not allowed to read from the Application Code section.  
3
4
0
0
0
1
LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not  
allowed to read from the Application Code section.  
Note:  
1. “1” = unprogrammed, “0” = programmed  
Table 38. Boot Lock Bit1 Protection Modes (Boot Loader Section)(1)  
BLB1  
BLB1 Mode BLB12  
1
1
0
Protection  
No restrictions for SPM, LPM accessing Boot Loader  
section  
1
2
1
1
SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section.  
SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section,  
and LPM executing from the Application Code section is  
not allowed to read from the Boot Loader section.  
3
4
0
0
0
1
LPM executing from the Application Code section is not  
allowed to read from the Boot Loader section.  
Note:  
1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed  
Entering the Boot Loader Entering the Boot Loader takes place by a jump or call from the application program.  
This may be initiated by some trigger such as a command received via UART or SPI  
Program  
interface. Alternatively, the Boot Reset Fuse (BOOTRST) can be programmed so that  
the Reset Vector is pointing to address $1E00 after a reset. In this case, the Boot  
Loader is started after the reset. After the application code is loaded, the program can  
start executing the application code. Note that the fuses cannot be changed by the MCU  
itself. This means that once the Boot Reset Fuse is programmed, the Reset Vector will  
always point to the Boot Loader Reset and the fuse can only be changed through the  
serial or parallel programming interface. The BOOTRST fuse can also be locked by pro-  
gramming LB1. When LB1 is programmed it is not possible to change the BOOTRST  
fuse unless a Chip Erase command is performed first.  
111  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Table 39. Boot Reset Fuse, BOOTRST(1)  
BOOTRST  
Reset Address  
1
0
Reset Vector = Application Reset (address $0000)  
Reset Vector = Boot Loader Reset (address $1E00)  
Note:  
1. “1” means unprogrammed, “0” means programmed  
Capabilities of the Boot  
Loader  
The program code within the Boot Loader section has the ability to read from and write  
into the entire Flash, including the Boot Loader Memory. This allows the user to update  
both the Application code and the Boot Loader code that handles the software update.  
The Boot Loader can thus even modify itself, and it can also erase itself from the code if  
the feature is not needed anymore. Special care must be taken if the user allows the  
Boot Loader section to be updated by leaving Boot Lock bit11 unprogrammed. An acci-  
dental write to the Boot Loader itself can corrupt the entire Boot Loader, and further  
software updates might be impossible. If it is not needed to change the Boot Loader  
software itself, it is recommended that the Boot Lock bit 11 be programmed to protect  
the Boot Loader software from software changes.  
Self-programming the  
Flash  
Programming of the Flash is executed one page at a time. The Flash page must be  
erased first for correct programming. The general Write Lock (Lock Bit 2) does not con-  
trol the programming of the Flash memory by SPM instruction. Similarly, the Read/Write  
Lock (Lock Bit 1) does not control reading or writing by LPM/SPM, if it is attempted.  
The Program memory can only be updated page-by-page, not word by word. One page  
is 128 bytes (64 words). The Program memory will be modified by first performing page  
erase, then by filling the temporary page buffer one word at a time using SPM, and then  
by executing page write. If only part of the page needs to be changed, the other parts  
must be stored (for example, in the temporary page buffer) before the erase, and then  
be rewritten. The temporary page buffer can be accessed in a random sequence. The  
CPU is halted both during page erase and during page write and the SPMEN bit in the  
SPMCR Register will be auto-cleared. For future compatibility, however, it is recom-  
mended that the user software verify that the SPMEN bit is cleared before starting a new  
page erase, page write, or before writing the Lock bits command (see code examples  
below). It is essential that the page address used in both the page erase and page write  
operation is addressing the same page.  
Setting the Boot Loader Lock To set the Boot Loader Lock bits, write the desired data to R0, write “1001” to SPMCR,  
bits by SPM  
and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCR. The only accessible  
Lock bits are the Boot Lock bits that may prevent the Application Code and Boot Loader  
sections from any software update by the MCU. See Table 37 and Table 38 for how the  
different settings of the Boot Loader bits affect the Flash access.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BLB12  
BLB11  
BLB02  
BLB01  
R0  
If bit5 - bit2 in R0 is cleared (zero), the corresponding Boot Lock bit will be programmed  
if an SPM instruction is executed within four cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in  
SPMCR.  
Performing Page Erase by  
SPM  
To execute a page erase, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “0011” to SPMCR,  
and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCR. The data in R1 and R0  
are ignored. The page address must be written to Z13:Z7. Other bits in the Z-pointer will  
be ignored during this operation.  
112  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
Fill the Temporary Buffer  
Perform a Page Write  
To write an instruction word, set up the address in the Z-pointer and data in R1:R0, write  
“0001” to SPMCR, and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCR. The  
content of Z6:Z1 is used to address the data in the temporary buffer. Z13:Z7 must point  
to the page that is supposed to be written.  
To execute a page write, set up the address in the Z-pointer, write “0101” to SPMCR,  
and execute SPM within four clock cycles after writing SPMCR. The data in R1 and R0  
are ignored. The page address must be written to Z13:Z7. During this operation, Z6:Z0  
must be zero to ensure that the page is written correctly. When a page write operation is  
completed, the Z-pointer will point to the first word in the successive page.  
Code Example  
Wait: in  
r16,SPMCR ; read SPMCR Register  
sbrc r16,SPMEN ; Wait for SPMEN to be cleared (indicates that previous  
write operation is completed)  
rjmp Wait  
; if not cleared, keep waiting  
ldi  
r16,(1<<PGWRT) + (1<<SPMEN) ; The previous writing is completed,  
set up for next erase  
out  
spm  
SPMCR,r16 ; output to register  
; start the erase operation  
Addressing the FLASH during The Z-pointer is used to address the SPM commands.  
Self-programming  
Bit  
15  
Z15  
Z7  
7
14  
Z14  
Z6  
6
13  
Z13  
Z5  
5
12  
Z12  
Z4  
4
11  
Z11  
Z3  
3
10  
Z10  
Z2  
2
9
Z9  
Z1  
1
8
Z8  
Z0  
0
$1F ($1F)  
$1E ($1E)  
ZH  
ZL  
Z15:Z14 always ignored  
Z13:Z7 page select, for page erase, page write  
Z6:Z1  
Z0  
word select, for filling temp buffer (must be zero during page write operation)  
should be zero for all SPM commands, byte select for the LPM instruction  
The only operation that does not use the Z-pointer is setting the Boot Loader Lock bits.  
The content of the Z-pointer is ignored and will have no effect on the operation.  
Note that the page erase and page write operation are addressed independently. There-  
fore, it is of major importance that the Boot Loader software addresses the same page in  
both the page erase and page write operations.  
The LPM instruction also uses the Z-pointer to store the address. Since this instruction  
addresses the Flash byte-by-byte, the LSB (bit Z0) of the Z-pointer is also used. See  
page 16 for a detailed description.  
Accidental writing into Flash program by the SPM instruction is prevented by setting up  
an “SPM enable time window”. All accesses are executed by first setting I/O bits, and  
then by executing SPM within four clock cycles. The I/O Register that controls the SPM  
accesses is defined below.  
113  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Store Program Memory  
Control Register – SPMCR  
The Store Program Memory Control Register contains the control bits needed to control  
the programming of the Flash from internal code execution.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
BLBSET  
R/W  
2
PGWRT  
R/W  
0
1
PGERS  
R/W  
0
0
SPMEN  
R/W  
0
$37 ($57)  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
SPMCR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
• Bits 7..4 Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in the ATmega161 and always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 BLBSET: Boot Lock Bit Set  
If this bit is set at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock  
cycles sets Boot Lock bits according to the data in R0. The data in R1 and the address  
in the Z-pointer are ignored. The BLBSET bit will auto-clear upon completion of Lock bit  
set, or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted dur-  
ing Lock bit setting. Only a chip erase can clear the Lock bits.  
An LPM instruction within four cycles after BLBSET and SPMEN are set in the SPMCR  
Register will put either the Lock bits or the Fuse bits (depending od the Z0 in the Z-  
pointer) into the destination register. See “Reading the Fuse and Lock bits from Soft-  
ware” for details.  
• Bit 2 PGWRT: Page Write  
If this bit is set at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock  
cycles executes page write, with the data stored in the temporary buffer. The page  
address is taken from the high part of the Z-pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored.  
The PGWRT bit will auto-clear upon completion of a page write or if no SPM instruction  
is executed within four clock cycles. The CPU is halted during the entire page write  
operation.  
• Bit 1 PGERS: Page Erase  
If this bit is set at the same time as SPMEN, the next SPM instruction within four clock  
cycles executes a page erase. The page address is taken from the high part of the Z-  
pointer. The data in R1 and R0 are ignored. The PGERS bit will auto-clear upon comple-  
tion of a page erase or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles. The  
CPU is halted during the entire page erase operation.  
• Bit 0 SPMEN: Store Program Memory Enable  
This bit enables the SPM instruction for the next four clock cycles. If set together with  
either BLBSET, PGWRT or PGERS, the following SPM instruction will have a special  
meaning (see description above). If only SPMEN is set, the following SPM instruction  
will store the value in R1:R0 in the temporary page buffer addressed by the Z-pointer.  
The LSB of the Z-pointer is ignored. The SPMEN bit will auto-clear upon completion of  
an SPM instruction or if no SPM instruction is executed within four clock cycles.  
Writing any combination other than “1001”, “0101”, “0011” or “0001” in the lower four  
bits, or writing to the I/O Register when any bits are set, will have no effect.  
114  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
EEPROM Write Prevents  
Writing to SPMCR  
Note that an EEPROM write operation will block all software programming to Flash.  
Reading the Fuse and Lock bits from software will also be prevented during the  
EEPROM write operation. It is recommended that the user check the status bit (EEWE)  
in the EECR Register and verify that the bit is cleared before writing to the SPMCR  
Register.  
Reading the Fuse and Lock  
bits from Software  
It is possible to read both the Fuse and Lock bits from software. To read the Lock bits,  
load the Z-pointer with $0001 and set the BLBSET and SPMEN bits in SPMCR. If an  
LPM instruction is executed within three CPU cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits  
are set in SPMCR, the Lock bits will be written to the destination register. The BLBSET  
and SPMEN bits will auto-clear upon completion of reading the Lock bits or if no  
LPM/SPM instruction is executed within three/four CPU cycles. When BLBSET and  
SPMEN are cleared, LPM will work as described in “Constant Addressing Using the  
LPM Instruction” on page 16 and in the Instruction Set manual.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BLB12  
BLB11  
BLB02  
BLB01  
LB2  
LB1  
R0/Rd  
The algorithm for reading the Fuse bits is similar to the one described above for reading  
the Lock bits. But when reading the Fuse bits, load $0000 in the Z-pointer. When an  
LPM instruction is executed within three cycles after the BLBSET and SPMEN bits are  
set in the SPMCR, the Fuse bits can be read in the destination register as shown below.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BOOTRST  
SPIEN  
SUT  
CKSEL[2]  
CKSEL[1]  
CKSEL[0]  
R0/Rd  
Fuse and Lock bits that are programmed will be read as zero.  
115  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Program Memory  
Lock bits  
The ATmega161 MCU provides six Lock bits that can be left unprogrammed (“1”) or can  
be programmed (“0”) to obtain the additional features listed in Table 40. The Lock bits  
can only be erased to “1” with the Chip Erase command.  
Table 40. Lock Bit Protection Modes (1)  
Memory Lock bits  
LB Mode  
LB1  
1
LB2  
1
Protection Type  
1
2
No memory lock features enabled  
0
1
Further programming of the Flash and EEPROM is  
disabled in parallel and Serial Programming modes. The  
Fuse bits are locked in both Serial and Parallel  
Programming modes.(1)  
3
0
0
Further programming and verification of the Flash and  
EEPROM is disabled in parallel and Serial Programming  
modes. The Fuse bits are locked in both Serial and  
Parallel Programming modes.(1)  
BLB0 Mode BLB02 BLB01  
1
2
3
1
1
0
1
0
0
No restrictions for SPM, LPM accessing the Application  
Code section  
SPM is not allowed to write to the Application Code  
section.  
SPM is not allowed to write to the Application Code  
section and LPM executing from Boot Loader section is  
not allowed to read from the Application Code section.  
4
0
1
LPM executing from the Boot Loader section is not  
allowed to read from the Application Code section.  
BLB1 Mode BLB12 BLB11  
1
1
1
No restrictions for SPM, LPM accessing the Boot Loader  
section  
2
3
1
0
0
0
SPM is not allowed to write the Boot Loader section.  
SPM is not allowed to write to the Boot Loader section and  
LPM executing from the Application Code section is not  
allowed to read from the Boot Loader section.  
4
0
1
LPM executing from the Application Code section is not  
allowed to read from the Boot Loader section.  
Note:  
1. Program the Fuse bits before programming the Lock bits.  
Fuse bits  
The ATmega161 has six Fuse bits: BOOTRST, SPIEN, SUT, and CKSEL [2:0].  
When BOOTRST is programmed (“0”), the Reset Vector is set to address $1E00,  
which is the first address location in the Boot Loader section of the Flash. If the  
BOOTRST is unprogrammed (“1”), the Reset Vector is set to address $0000. Default  
value is unprogrammed (“1”).  
When the SPIEN Fuse is programmed (“0”), Serial Program and Data Downloading  
is enabled. Default value is programmed (“0”). The SPIEN Fuse is not accessible in  
Serial Programming mode.  
The SUT Fuse changes the start-up times. Default value is unprogrammed (“1”).  
116  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
CKSEL2..0: See Table 4, “Reset Delay Selections(3),on page 26, for which  
combination of CKSEL2..0 to use. Default value is “010”.  
The status of the Fuse bits is not affected by Chip Erase. Note that the Fuse bits are  
locked if Lock bit1 (LB1) or Lock bit2 (LB2) is programmed. Program the Fuse bits  
before programming the Lock bits.  
Signature Bytes  
All Atmel microcontrollers have a 3-byte signature code that identifies the device. This  
code can be read in both Serial and Parallel modes. The three bytes reside in a sepa-  
rate address space, and for the ATmega161 they are:  
1. $000: $1E (indicates manufactured by Atmel)  
2. $001: $94 (indicates 16 KB Flash memory)  
3. $002: $01 (indicates ATmega161 device when $001 is $94)  
Programming the Flash  
and EEPROM  
Atmel’s ATmega161 offers 16K bytes of In-System Reprogrammable Flash Program  
memory and 512 bytes of EEPROM Data memory.  
The ATmega161 is normally shipped with the On-chip Flash program and EEPROM  
Data memory arrays in the erased state (i.e., contents = $FF) and ready to be pro-  
grammed. This device supports a High-voltage (12V) Parallel Programming mode and a  
Low-voltage Serial Programming mode. The +12V is used for programming enable only,  
and no current of significance is drawn by this pin. The Serial Programming mode pro-  
vides a convenient way to download the program and data into the ATmega161 inside  
the user’s system.  
The Program memory array on the ATmega161 is organized as 128 pages of 128 bytes  
each. When programming the Flash, the program data is latched into a page buffer. This  
allows one page of program data to be programmed simultaneously in either Program-  
ming mode.  
The EEPROM Data Memory array on the ATmega161 is programmed byte-by-byte in  
either Programming mode. An auto-erase cycle is provided with the self-timed EEPROM  
programming operation in the Serial Programming mode.  
During programming, the supply voltage must be in accordance with Table 41.  
Table 41. Supply Voltage during Programming  
Part  
Serial Programming  
2.7 - 5.5V  
Parallel Programming  
4.5 - 5.5V  
ATmega161L  
ATmega161  
4.0 - 5.5V  
4.5 - 5.5V  
117  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
Parallel Programming  
This section describes how to parallel program and verify Flash Program memory,  
EEPROM Data memory, Lock bits and Fuse bits in the ATmega161. Pulses are  
assumed to be at least 500 ns unless otherwise noted.  
Signal Names  
In this section, some pins of the ATmega161 are referenced by signal names describing  
their functionality during parallel programming (see Figure 75 and Table 42). Pins not  
described in the following table are referenced by pin name.  
The XA1/XA0 pins determine the action executed when the XTAL1 pin is given a posi-  
tive pulse. The bit codings are shown in Table 43.  
When pulsing WR or OE, the command loaded determines the action executed. The  
command is a byte where the different bits are assigned functions as shown in Table 44.  
Figure 75. Parallel Programming  
ATmega161  
+5V  
RDY/BSY  
OE  
PD1  
PD2  
PD3  
PD4  
PD5  
PD6  
PD7  
VCC  
PB7 - PB0  
DATA  
WR  
BS1  
XA0  
XA1  
PAGEL  
+12 V  
RESET  
PA0  
XTAL1  
GND  
Table 42. Pin Name Mapping  
Signal Name in  
Programming Mode Pin Name I/O Function  
RDY/BSY  
PD1  
O
0: Device is busy programming; 1: Device is ready  
for new command  
OE  
WR  
BS1  
PD2  
PD3  
PD4  
I
I
I
Output Enable (Active low)  
Write Pulse (Active low)  
Byte Select 1 (“0” selects Low byte, “1” selects  
High byte)  
XA0  
XA1  
PD5  
PD6  
I
I
XTAL Action Bit 0  
XTAL Action Bit 1  
118  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 42. Pin Name Mapping  
Signal Name in  
Programming Mode Pin Name I/O Function  
PAGEL  
BS2  
PD7  
PA0  
I
I
Program Memory Page Load  
Byte Select 2 (Always low)  
DATA  
PB7 - 0  
I/O Bi-directional Data Bus (Output when OE is low)  
Table 43. XA1 and XA0 Coding  
XA1  
XA0  
Action when XTAL1 is Pulsed  
Load Flash or EEPROM Address (High or low address byte determined by BS1)  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Load Data (High or low data byte for Flash determined by BS1)  
Load Command  
No Action, Idle  
Table 44. Command Byte Bit Coding  
Command Byte  
1000 0000  
Command Executed  
Chip Erase  
0100 0000  
Write Fuse bits  
Write Lock bits  
0010 0000  
0001 0000  
Write Flash  
0001 0001  
Write EEPROM  
Read Signature Bytes  
Read Fuse and Lock bits  
Read Flash  
0000 1000  
0000 0100  
0000 0010  
0000 0011  
Read EEPROM  
Enter Programming Mode  
The following algorithm puts the device in Parallel Programming mode:  
1. Apply 4.5 - 5.5V between VCC and GND.  
2. Set RESET and BS pins to “0” and wait at least 500 ns.  
3. Apply 11.5 - 12.5V to RESET, and wait for at least 500 ns.  
Chip Erase  
The Chip Erase will erase the Flash and EEPROM memories plus Lock bits. The Lock  
bits are not reset until the Program memory has been completely erased. The Fuse bits  
are not changed. A Chip Erase must be performed before the Flash is reprogrammed.  
Load Command “Chip Erase”  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.  
2. Set BS1 to “0”.  
3. Set DATA to “1000 0000”. This is the command for Chip Erase.  
4. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts the Chip Erase. RDY/BSY goes low.  
5. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high before loading a new command.  
119  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Programming the Flash  
The Flash is organized as 128 pages of 128 bytes each. When programming the Flash,  
the program data is latched into a page buffer. This allows one page of program data to  
be programmed simultaneously. The following procedure describes how to program the  
entire Flash memory:  
A. Load Command “Write Flash”  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.  
2. Set BS1 to “0”.  
3. Set DATA to “0001 0000”. This is the command for Write Flash.  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command.  
B. Load Address Low Byte  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading.  
2. Set BS1 to “0”. This selects low address.  
3. Set DATA = Address Low byte ($00 - $FF).  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address Low byte.  
C. Load Data Low Byte  
1. Set BS1 to “0”. This selects low data byte.  
2. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading.  
3. Set DATA = Data Low byte ($00 - $FF).  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.  
D. Latch Data Low Byte  
Give PAGEL a positive pulse. This latches the data Low byte.  
(See Figure 76 for signal waveforms.)  
E. Load Data High Byte  
1. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high data byte.  
2. Set XA1, XA0 to “01”. This enables data loading.  
3. Set DATA = Data High byte ($00 - $FF).  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the data byte.  
F. Latch Data High Byte  
Give PAGEL a positive pulse. This latches the data High byte.  
G. Repeat “B” through “F” 64 times to fill the page buffer.  
To address a page in the Flash, seven bits are needed (128 pages). The five most sig-  
nificant bits are read from address High byte as described in section “H” below. The two  
least significant page address bits, however, are the two most significant bits (bit7 and  
bit6) of the latest loaded address Low byte as described in section “B”.  
H. Load Address High byte  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “00”. This enables address loading.  
2. Set BS1 to “1”. This selects high address.  
3. Set DATA = Address High byte ($00 - $1F).  
4. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the address High byte.  
I. Program Page  
120  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
1. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the entire page of data.  
RDY/BSYgoes low.  
2. Wait until RDY/BSY goes high.  
(See Figure 77 for signal waveforms.)  
J. End Page Programming  
1. Set XA1, XA0 to “10”. This enables command loading.  
2. Set DATA to “0000 0000”. This is the command for No Operation.  
3. Give XTAL1 a positive pulse. This loads the command, and the internal write sig-  
nals are reset.  
K. Repeat “A” through “J” 128 times or until all data have been programmed.  
Figure 76. Programming the Flash Waveforms  
DATA  
$10  
ADDR. LOW  
ADDR. HIGH  
DATA LOW  
XA1  
XA2  
BS1  
XTAL1  
WR  
RDY/BSY  
RESET  
+12V  
OE  
BS2  
PAGEL  
Figure 77. Programming the Flash Waveforms (Continued)  
DATA  
DATA HIGH  
XA1  
XA0  
BS1  
XTAL1  
WR  
RDY/BSY  
RESET  
OE  
+12V  
PAGEL  
BS2  
121  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Programming the EEPROM  
The programming algorithm for the EEPROM Data memory is as follows (refer to “Pro-  
gramming the Flash” for details on command, address and data loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0001 0001”.  
2. H: Load Address High Byte ($00 - $01)  
3. B: Load Address Low Byte ($00 - $FF)  
4. E: Load Data Low Byte ($00 - $FF)  
L: Write Data Low Byte  
1. Set BS to “0”. This selects low data.  
2. Give WR a negative pulse. This starts programming of the data byte. RDY/BSY  
goes low.  
3. Wait until to RDY/BSY goes high before programming the next byte.  
(See Figure 78 for signal waveforms.)  
The loaded command and address are retained in the device during programming. For  
efficient programming, the following should be considered:  
The command needs to be loaded only once when writing or reading multiple  
memory locations.  
Address High byte only needs to be loaded before programming a new 256-word  
page in the EEPROM.  
Skip writing the data value $FF, that is, the contents of the entire EEPROM after a  
Chip Erase.  
These considerations also apply to Flash, EEPROM and Signature bytes reading.  
Figure 78. Programming the EEPROM Waveforms  
DATA  
$11  
ADDR. HIGH  
ADDR. LOW  
DATA LOW  
XA1  
XA2  
BS1  
XTAL1  
WR  
RDY/BSY  
RESET  
+12V  
OE  
BS2  
PAGEL  
122  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Reading the Flash  
The algorithm for reading the Flash memory is as follows (refer to “Programming the  
Flash” on page 120 for details on command and address loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0000 0010”.  
2. H: Load Address High Byte ($00 - $1F)  
3. B: Load Address Low Byte ($00 - $FF)  
4. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The Flash word Low byte can now be read at  
DATA.  
5. Set BS to “1”. The Flash word High byte can now be read at DATA.  
6. Set OE to “1”.  
Reading the EEPROM  
The algorithm for reading the EEPROM memory is as follows (refer to “Programming the  
Flash” on page 120 for details on command and address loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0000 0011”.  
2. H: Load Address High Byte ($00 - $01)  
3. B: Load Address ($00 - $FF)  
4. Set OE to “0”, and BS1 to “0”. The EEPROM Data byte can now be read at  
DATA.  
5. Set OE to “1”.  
Programming the Fuse Bits  
The algorithm for programming the Fuse bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the  
Flash” on page 120 for details on command and data loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0100 0000”.  
2. C: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs and bit n = “1” erases the Fuse bit.  
Bit 6 = BOOTRST Fuse bit  
Bit 5 = SPIEN Fuse bit  
Bit 4 = SUT Fuse bit  
Bit 3 = “1”. This bit is reserved and must be left unprogrammed (“1”).  
Bits 2 - 0 = CKSEL2..0 Fuse bits  
Bit 7 = “1”. This bit is reserved and should be left unprogrammed (“1”).  
3. Give WR a negative pulse and wait for RDY/BSY to go high.  
Programming the Lock Bits  
The algorithm for programming the Lock bits is as follows (refer to “Programming the  
Flash” on page 120 for details on command and data loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0010 0000”.  
2. D: Load Data Low Byte. Bit n = “0” programs the Lock bit.  
Bit 5 = Boot Lock Bit12  
Bit 4 = Boot Lock Bit11  
Bit 3 = Boot Lock Bit02  
Bit 2 = Boot Lock Bit01  
Bit 1 = Lock Bit2  
Bit 0 = Lock Bit1  
Bits 7 - 6 = “1”. These bits are reserved and should be left unprogrammed (“1”).  
3. L: Write Data Low Byte.  
The Lock bits can only be cleared by executing Chip Erase.  
123  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Reading the Fuse and Lock  
Bits  
The algorithm for reading the Fuse and Lock bits is as follows (refer to “Programming  
the Flash” on page 120 for details on command loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0000 0100”.  
2. Set OE to “0”, and BS to “0”. The status of the Fuse bits can now be read at  
DATA (“0” means programmed).  
Bit 6 = BOOTRST Fuse bit  
Bit 5 = SPIEN Fuse bit  
Bit 4 = SUT Fuse bit  
Bit 3 = “1”. This bit is reserved and must be left unprogrammed (“1”).  
Bits 2 - 0 = CKSEL2..0 Fuse bits  
3. Set OE to “0”, and BS to “1”. The status of the Lock bits can now be read at DATA  
(“0” means programmed).  
Bit 5 = Boot Lock Bit12  
Bit 4 = Boot Lock Bit11  
Bit 3 = Boot Lock Bit02  
Bit 2 = Boot Lock Bit01  
Bit 1 = Lock Bit2  
Bit 0 = Lock Bit1  
4. Set OE to “1”.  
Reading the Signature Bytes  
The algorithm for reading the Signature bytes is as follows (refer to “Programming the  
Flash” on page 120 for details on command and address loading):  
1. A: Load Command “0000 1000”.  
2. C: Load Address Low Byte ($00 - $02).  
Set OE to “0”, and BS to “0”. The selected Signature byte can now be read at DATA.  
3. Set OE to “1”.  
Parallel Programming  
Characteristics  
Figure 79. Parallel Programming Timing  
tXLWL  
tXHXL  
XTAL1  
tDVXH  
tXLDX  
Data & Control  
(DATA, XA0/1, BS1)  
tBVXH  
tPLBX tBVWL  
tRHBX  
PAGEL  
tPHPL  
tWLWH  
WR  
tPLWL  
WLRL  
RDY/BSY  
tWLRH  
tOHDZ  
OE  
tXLOL  
tOLDV  
DATA  
124  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table 45. Parallel Programming Characteristics, TA = 25°C 10%, VCC = 5V  
10%(1)(2)(3)  
Symbol  
VPP  
Parameter  
Programming Enable Voltage  
Programming Enable Current  
Data and Control Valid before XTAL1 High  
XTAL1 Pulse Width High  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
12.5  
250  
Units  
V
11.5  
IPP  
µA  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
µs  
ms  
ms  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tDVXH  
tXHXL  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
0
tXLDX  
Data and Control Hold after XTAL1 Low  
XTAL1 Low to WR Low  
tXLWL  
tBVXH  
tPHPL  
BS1 Valid before XTAL1 High  
PAGEL Pulse Width High  
tPLBX  
BS1 Hold after PAGEL Low  
PAGEL Low to WR Low  
tPLWL  
tBVWL  
tRHBX  
tWLWH  
tWLRL  
tWLRH  
tWLRH_CE  
tWLRH_FLASH  
tXLOL  
BS1 Valid to WR Low  
BS1 Hold after RDY/BSY High  
WR Pulse Width Low  
WR Low to RDY/BSY Low  
2.5  
1.7  
28  
WR Low to RDY/BSY High(1)  
WR Low to RDY/BSY High for Chip Erase(2)  
WR Low to RDY/BSY High for Write Flash(3)  
XTAL1 Low to OE Low  
1
16  
8
14  
67  
tOLDV  
OE Low to DATA Valid  
20  
tOHDZ  
OE High to DATA Tri-stated  
20  
Notes: 1. tWLRH is valid for the Write EEPROM, Write Fuse bits and Write Lock bits commands.  
2. tWLRH_CE is valid for the Chip Erase command.  
3. tWLRH_FLASH is valid for the Write Flash command.  
Serial Downloading  
Both the Flash and EEPROM memory arrays can be programmed using the serial SPI  
bus while RESET is pulled to GND. The serial interface consists of pins SCK, MOSI  
(input) and MISO (output). After RESET is set low, the Programming Enable instruction  
needs to be executed first, before program/erase operations can be executed.  
When programming the EEPROM, an auto-erase cycle is built into the self-timed pro-  
gramming operation (in the Serial mode ONLY) and there is no need to first execute the  
Chip Erase instruction. The chip erase operation turns the contents of every memory  
location in both the program and EEPROM arrays into $FF.  
The program and EEPROM memory arrays have separate address spaces:  
$0000 to $1FFF for Program memory and $0000 to $01FF for EEPROM memory.  
Either an external system clock is supplied at pin XTAL1 or a crystal needs to be con-  
nected across pins XTAL1 and XTAL2. The minimum low and high periods for the serial  
clock (SCK) input are defined as follows:  
Low: > 2 XTAL1 clock cycles  
High: > 2 XTAL1 clock cycles  
125  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Serial Programming  
Algorithm  
When writing serial data to the ATmega161, data is clocked on the rising edge of SCK.  
When reading data from the ATmega161, data is clocked on the falling edge of SCK.  
See Figure 80, Figure 81 and Table 49 for timing details.  
To program and verify the ATmega161 in the Serial Programming mode, the following  
sequence is recommended (see 4-byte instruction formats in Table 48):  
1. Power-up sequence:  
Apply power between VCC and GND while RESET and SCK are set to “0”. If a crys-  
tal is not connected across pins XTAL1 and XTAL2, apply a clock signal to the  
XTAL1 pin. In some systems, the programmer cannot guarantee that SCK is held  
low during power-up. In this case, RESET must be given a positive pulse of at least  
two XTAL1 cycles’ duration after SCK has been set to “0”.  
2. Wait for at least 20 ms and enable serial programming by sending the Program-  
ming Enable serial instruction to pin MOSI/PB5.  
3. The serial programming instructions will not work if the communication is out of  
synchronization. When in sync, the second byte ($53) will echo back when issu-  
ing the third byte of the Programming Enable instruction. Whether or not the  
echo is correct, all four bytes of the instruction must be transmitted. If the $53 did  
not echo back, give RESET a positive pulse and issue a new Programming  
Enable command.  
4. If a chip erase is performed (must be done to erase the Flash), give RESET a  
positive pulse and start over from step 2.  
5. The Flash is programmed one page at a time. The memory page is loaded one  
byte at a time by supplying the 6 LSB of the address and data together with the  
Load Program Memory Page instruction. The Program Memory Page is stored  
by loading the Write Program Memory Page instruction with the 7 MSB of the  
address. If polling is not used, the user must wait at least tWD_FLASH before issu-  
ing the next page (please refer to Table 46). Accessing the serial programming  
interface before the Flash write operation completes can result in incorrect  
programming.  
6. The EEPROM array is programmed one byte at a time by supplying the address  
and data together with the appropriate Write instruction. An EEPROM memory  
location is first automatically erased before new data is written. If polling is not  
used, the user must wait at least tWD_EEPROM before issuing the next byte (please  
refer to Table 46). In a chip-erased device, no $FFs in the data file(s) need to be  
programmed.  
7. Any memory location can be verified by using the Read instruction, which  
returns the content at the selected address at serial output MISO/PB6.  
8. At the end of the programming session, RESET can be set high to commence  
normal operation.  
9. Power-off sequence (if needed):  
Set XTAL1 to “0” (if a crystal is not used).  
Set RESET to “1”.  
Turn VCC power off.  
Data Polling Flash  
When a page is being programmed into the Flash, reading an address location within  
the page being programmed will give the value $FF. At the time the device is ready for a  
new page, the programmed value will read correctly. This is used to determine when the  
next page can be written. Note that the entire page is written simultaneously and any  
address within the page can be used for polling. Data polling of the FLASH will not work  
for the value $FF, so when programming this value, the user will have to wait for at least  
126  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
tWD_FLASH before programming the next page. As a chip-erased device contains $FF in  
all locations, programming of addresses that are meant to contain $FF can be skipped.  
See Table 46 for tWD_FLASH value.  
Data Polling EEPROM  
When a new byte has been written and is being programmed into EEPROM, reading the  
address location being programmed will give the value $FF. At the time the device is  
ready for a new byte, the programmed value will read correctly. This is used to deter-  
mine when the next byte can be written. This will not work for the value $FF, but the user  
should keep the following in mind: As a chip-erased device contains $FF in all locations,  
programming of addresses that are meant to contain $FF can be skipped. This does not  
apply if the EEPROM is reprogrammed without chip-erasing the device. In this case,  
data polling cannot be used for the value $FF, and the user will have to wait at least  
tWD_EEPROM before programming the next byte. See Table 46 for tWD_EEPROM value.  
Table 46. Minimum Wait Delay before Writing the Next Flash or EEPROM Location  
Symbol  
Minimum Wait Delay  
14 ms  
tWD_FLASH  
tWD_EEPROM  
3.4 ms  
Table 47. Minimum Wait Delay after a Chip Erase Command  
Symbol  
Minimum Wait Delay  
28 ms  
tWD_ERASE  
Figure 80. Serial Programming Waveforms  
SERIAL DATA INPUT  
PB5 (MOSI)  
MSB  
LSB  
LSB  
SERIAL DATA OUTPUT  
PB6 (MISO)  
MSB  
SERIAL CLOCK INPUT  
PB7(SCK)  
SAMPLE  
127  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
.
Table 48. Serial Programming Instruction Set(1)  
Instruction Format  
Instruction  
Byte 1  
Byte 2  
Byte 3  
Byte 4  
Operation  
Programming Enable  
1010 1100  
0101 0011  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
Enable Serial Programming after  
RESET goes low.  
Chip Erase  
1010 1100  
100x xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
Chip Erase EEPROM and Flash.  
Read Program Memory  
0010 H000  
xxxa aaaa  
bbbb bbbb  
oooo oooo  
Read H (high or low) data o from  
Program memory at word address  
a:b.  
Load Program Memory  
Page  
0100 H000  
xxxx xxxx  
xxbb bbbb  
iiii iiii  
Write H (high or low) data i to  
Program memory page at word  
address b.  
Write Program Memory  
Page  
0100 1100  
1010 0000  
1100 0000  
0101 1000  
1010 1100  
0011 0000  
1010 1100  
0101 0000  
xxxa aaaa  
xxxx xxxa  
xxxx xxxa  
xxxx xxxx  
111x xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
101x xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
bbxx xxxx  
bbbb bbbb  
bbbb bbbb  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxbb  
xxxx xxxx  
xxxx xxxx  
iiii iiii  
oooo oooo  
iiii iiii  
xx65 4321  
1165 4321  
oooo oooo  
1D1B 1987  
xDCB 1987  
Write Program memory page at  
address a:b.  
Read EEPROM Memory  
Write EEPROM Memory  
Read Lock bits  
Read data o from EEPROM  
memory at address a:b.  
Write data i to EEPROM memory  
at address a:b.  
Read Lock bits. “0” = programmed,  
“1” = unprogrammed.  
Write Lock bits  
Write Lock bits. Set bits 6 - 1 = “0”  
to program Lock bits.  
Read Signature Byte  
Write Fuse bits  
Read Signature byte o at address  
b.  
Set bits D - B, 9 - 7 = “0” to  
program, “1” to unprogram  
Read Fuse bits  
Read Fuse bits. “0” = programmed,  
“1” = unprogrammed  
Note:  
1. a = address high bits  
b = address low bits  
H = 0 – Low byte, 1 – High Byte  
o = data out  
i = data in  
x = don’t care  
1 = lock bit 1  
2 = lock bit 2  
3 = Boot Lock Bit1  
4 = Boot Lock Bit2  
5 = Boot Lock Bit11  
6 = Boot Lock Bit12  
7 = CKSEL0 Fuse  
8 = CKSEL1 Fuse  
9 = CKSEL2 Fuse  
B = SUT Fuse  
C = SPIEN Fuse  
D = BOOTRST Fuse  
128  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Serial Programming  
Characteristics  
Figure 81. Serial Programming Timing  
MOSI  
tOVSH  
tSLSH  
tSHOX  
SCK  
tSHSL  
MISO  
tSLIV  
Table 49. Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V  
(unless otherwise noted)  
Symbol Parameter  
1/tCLCL Oscillator Frequency  
Min  
0
Typ Max Units  
(VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V)  
(VCC = 4.0 - 5.5V)  
(VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V)  
(VCC = 4.0 - 5.5V)  
4
8
MHz  
MHz  
ns  
0
tCLCL  
Oscillator Period  
250  
125  
ns  
tSHSL  
tSLSH  
tOVSH  
tSHOX  
tSLIV  
SCK Pulse Width High  
SCK Pulse Width Low  
MOSI Setup to SCK High  
MOSI Hold after SCK High  
SCK Low to MISO Valid  
2 tCLCL  
2 tCLCL  
tCLCL  
2 tCLCL  
10  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
16  
32  
ns  
129  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Electrical Characteristics  
Absolute Maximum Ratings*  
Operating Temperature.................................. -55°C to +125°C  
*NOTICE:  
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute  
Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent dam-  
age to the device. This is a stress rating only and  
functional operation of the device at these or  
other conditions beyond those indicated in the  
operational sections of this specification is not  
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating  
conditions for extended periods may affect device  
reliability.  
Storage Temperature..................................... -65°C to +150°C  
Voltage on Any Pin except RESET  
with Respect to Ground.............................-1.0V to VCC + 0.5V  
Voltage on RESET with Respect to Ground ....-1.0V to +13.0V  
Maximum Operating Voltage ............................................ 6.6V  
DC Current per I/O Pin ............................................... 40.0 mA  
DC Current VCC and GND Pins............................... 200.0 mA  
130  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
DC Characteristics  
TA = -40°C to 85°C, VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V (unless otherwise noted)(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)  
Symbol  
VIL  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min  
-0.5  
Typ  
Max  
0.3 VCC  
0.2 VCC  
Units  
(1)  
(1)  
Input Low Voltage  
Input Low Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
Input High Voltage  
(Except XTAL1)  
(XTAL1)  
V
V
V
V
V
VIL1  
-0.5  
(2)  
(2)  
(2)  
VIH  
(Except XTAL1, RESET)  
(XTAL1)  
0.6 VCC  
0.8 VCC  
0.9 VCC  
VCC + 0.5  
VCC + 0.5  
VCC + 0.5  
VIH1  
VIH2  
(RESET)  
Output Low Voltage(3)  
(Ports A,B,C,D)  
IOL = 20 mA, VCC = 5V  
IOL = 10 mA, VCC = 3V  
0.6  
0.5  
V
V
VOL  
VOH  
IIL  
Output High Voltage(4)  
(Ports A,B,C,D)  
I
OH = -3 mA, VCC = 5V  
4.2  
2.3  
V
V
IOH = -1.5 mA, VCC = 3V  
Input Leakage  
Current I/O pin  
VCC = 5.5V, pin low  
(absolute value)  
8.0  
µA  
Input Leakage  
Current I/O pin  
VCC = 5.5V, pin high  
(absolute value)  
980  
nA  
IIH  
RRST  
RI/O  
Reset Pull-up Resistor  
I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor  
100  
35  
500  
120  
kΩ  
kΩ  
Active mode, VCC = 3V,  
4 MHz  
3.0  
1.2  
mA  
mA  
Idle mode VCC = 3V,  
4 MHz  
ICC  
Power Supply Current  
Power-down mode(5)  
WDT enabled, VCC = 3V  
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V  
9
15.0  
2.0  
µA  
µA  
<1  
Analog Comparator  
Input Offset Voltage  
VCC = 5V  
Vin = VCC/2  
VACIO  
IACLK  
tACPD  
40  
50  
mV  
nA  
ns  
Analog Comparator  
Input Leakage Current  
VCC = 5V  
Vin = VCC/2  
-50  
Analog Comparator  
Propagation Delay  
VCC = 2.7V  
VCC = 4.0V  
750  
500  
Notes: 1. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low.  
2. “Min” means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high.  
3. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (20 mA at VCC = 5V, 10 mA at VCC = 3V) under steady-state  
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:  
1] The sum of all IOL, for all ports, should not exceed 200 mA.  
2] The sum of all IOL, for ports B0 - B7, D0 - D7 and XTAL2, should not exceed 100 mA.  
3] The sum of all IOL, for ports A0 - A7, ALE, OC1B and C0 - C7 should not exceed 100 mA.  
If IOL exceeds the test condition, VOL may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater  
than the listed test condition.  
4. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (3 mA at VCC = 5V, 1.5 mA at VCC = 3V) under steady-state  
conditions (non-transient), the following must be observed:  
1] The sum of all IOH, for all ports, should not exceed 200 mA.  
2] The sum of all IOH, for ports B0 - B7, D0 - D7 and XTAL2, should not exceed 100 mA.  
3] The sum of all IOH, for ports A0 - A7, ALE, OC1B and C0 - C7 should not exceed 100 mA.  
131  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
If IOH exceeds the test condition, VOH may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to source current  
greater than the listed test condition.  
5. Minimum VCC for power-down is 2V.  
External Clock Drive  
Figure 82. External Clock  
Waveforms  
VIH1  
VIL1  
Table 50. External Clock Drive(1)  
VCC = 2.7V to 5.5V  
VCC = 4.0V to 5.5V  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
Parameter  
Oscillator Frequency  
Clock Period  
High Time  
Min  
0
Max  
Min  
0
Max  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
4
8
250  
100  
100  
125  
50  
tCHCX  
tCLCX  
ns  
Low Time  
50  
ns  
tCLCH  
Rise Time  
1.6  
1.6  
0.5  
0.5  
µs  
tCHCL  
Fall Time  
µs  
Notes: 1. See “External Data Memory Timing” for a description of how the duty cycle influences  
the timing for the external Data memory.  
132  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
External Data Memory Timing  
Table 51. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.0 - 5.5 Volts, No Wait State  
8 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tLHLL  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1
2
Oscillator Frequency  
ALE Pulse Width  
0.0  
8.0  
95  
1.0tCLCL-30  
0.5tCLCL-40(1)  
tAVLL  
Address Valid A to ALE Low  
22.5  
ns  
Address Hold After ALE Low,  
write access  
3a tLLAX_ST  
3b tLLAX_LD  
10  
15  
10  
ns  
ns  
Address Hold after ALE Low,  
read access  
15  
4
5
6
7
8
9
tAVLLC  
tAVRL  
tAVWL  
tLLWL  
tLLRL  
Address Valid C to ALE Low  
Address Valid to RD Low  
Address Valid to WR Low  
ALE Low to WR Low  
ALE Low to RD Low  
22.5  
95  
0.5tCLCL-40(1)  
1.0tCLCL-30  
1.0tCLCL-30  
0.5tCLCL-20(2)  
0.5tCLCL-20(2)  
60  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
95  
42.5  
42.5  
60  
145  
145  
0.5tCLCL+20(2)  
0.5tCLCL+20(2)  
tDVRH  
Data Setup to RD High  
Read Low to Data Valid  
Data Hold After RD High  
RD Pulse Width  
10 tRLDV  
11 tRHDX  
12 tRLRH  
13 tDVWL  
14 tWHDX  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
65  
65  
0
0
105  
27.5  
27.5  
95  
1.0tCLCL-20  
0.5tCLCL-35(1)  
0.5tCLCL-35(1)  
1.0tCLCL-30  
1.0tCLCL-20  
Data Setup to WR Low  
Data Hold After WR High  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
105  
Notes: 1. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the high time of the external clock, XTAL1.  
2. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the low time of the external clock, XTAL1.  
Table 52. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.0 - 5.5 Volts, 1 Cycle Wait State  
8 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
8.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
185  
2.0tCLCL-65  
230  
220  
230  
2.0tCLCL-20  
2.0tCLCL-30  
2.0tCLCL-20  
ns  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
133  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Table 53. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.0 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0  
8 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
8.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
310  
3.0tCLCL-65  
355  
345  
35  
3.0tCLCL-20  
3.0tCLCL-30  
3.0tCLCL-20  
ns  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
Table 54. External Data Memory Characteristics, 4.0 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1  
8 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
8.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
14 tWHDX  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
310  
3.0tCLCL-65  
355  
152.5  
345  
3.0tCLCL-20  
1.5tCLCL-35  
3.0tCLCL-30  
3.0tCLCL-20  
ns  
Data Hold After WR High  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
355  
ns  
Table 55. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, No Wait State  
4 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tLHLL  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
0.0  
Max  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1
2
Oscillator Frequency  
ALE Pulse Width  
4.0  
195  
60  
tCLCL-55  
0.5tCLCL-65  
tAVLL  
Address Valid A to ALE Low  
ns  
Address Hold After ALE Low,  
write access  
3a tLLAX_ST  
3b tLLAX_LD  
10  
15  
10  
15  
ns  
ns  
Address Hold after ALE Low,  
read access  
4
5
6
7
8
9
tAVLLC  
tAVRL  
tAVWL  
tLLWL  
tLLRL  
Address Valid C to ALE Low  
Address Valid to RD Low  
Address Valid to WR Low  
ALE Low to WR Low  
60  
0.5tCLCL-65  
1.0tCLCL-50  
1.0tCLCL-50  
0.5tCLCL-20  
0.5tCLCL-20  
95  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
200  
200  
105  
105  
95  
145  
145  
0.5tCLCL+20  
0.5tCLCL+20  
ALE Low to RD Low  
tDVRH  
Data Setup to RD High  
Read Low to Data Valid  
Data Hold After RD High  
10 tRLDV  
11 tRHDX  
165  
165  
0
0
134  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Table 55. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, No Wait State (Continued)  
4 MHz Oscillator Variable Oscillator  
Min Max  
Symbol  
12 tRLRH  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
ns  
RD Pulse Width  
230  
70  
1.0tCLCL-20  
0.5tCLCL-55  
0.5tCLCL-0  
1.0tCLCL-40  
1.0tCLCL-20  
13 tDVWL  
14 tWHDX  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
Data Setup to WR Low  
Data Hold After WR High  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
125  
210  
230  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Notes: 1. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the high time of the external clock, XTAL1.  
2. This assumes 50% clock duty cycle. The half period is actually the low time of the external clock, XTAL1.  
Table 56. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 1  
4 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
4.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
335  
2.0tCLCL-165  
480  
460  
480  
2.0tCLCL-20  
2.0tCLCL-40  
2.0tCLCL-20  
ns  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
Table 57. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0  
4 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
4.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
585  
3.0tCLCL-165  
730  
710  
730  
3.0tCLCL-20  
3.0tCLCL-40  
3.0tCLCL-20  
ns  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
Table 58. External Data Memory Characteristics, 2.7 - 5.5 Volts, SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1  
4 MHz Oscillator  
Variable Oscillator  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
4.0  
Unit  
MHz  
ns  
0
1/tCLCL  
Oscillator Frequency  
Read Low to Data Valid  
RD Pulse Width  
0.0  
10 tRLDV  
12 tRLRH  
14 tWHDX  
15 tDVWH  
16 tWLWH  
585  
3.0tCLCL-165  
730  
375  
710  
730  
3.0tCLCL-20  
1.5tCLCL-0  
3.0tCLCL-40  
3.0tCLCL-20  
ns  
Data Hold After WR High  
Data Valid to WR High  
WR Pulse Width  
ns  
ns  
ns  
135  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Figure 83. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 0)  
T4  
T1  
T2  
T3  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
1
4
2
7
Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
Address  
15  
Address [15..8]  
Data/Address [7..0]  
WR  
XX  
XX  
3a 13  
Prev. data  
Address  
6
Data  
16  
14  
3b  
11  
9
Data  
XX  
Address  
5
Prev. data  
XX  
Data/Address [7..0]  
RD  
10  
8
12  
Figure 84. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 0, SRWn0 = 1)  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
T5  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
1
4
2
7
Prev. addr.  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
Address [15..8]  
Data/Address [7..0]  
WR  
XX  
15  
16  
3a 13  
Prev. data  
Address  
6
XX  
14  
3b  
11  
9
Data  
Address  
5
Prev. data  
XX  
XX  
Data/Address [7..0]  
RD  
10  
8
12  
136  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 85. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 0)  
T4  
T5  
T6  
T1  
T2  
T3  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
1
4
2
7
Address [15..8] Prev. addr.  
Data/Address [7..0] Prev. data  
WR  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
XX  
XX  
15  
3a 13  
Address  
6
14  
16  
9
3b  
11  
Data  
Data/Address [7..0]  
RD  
Address  
5
XX  
Prev. data  
XX  
10  
8
12  
Figure 86. External Memory Timing (SRWn1 = 1, SRWn0 = 1)(1)  
T4  
T6  
T5  
T7  
T1  
T2  
T3  
System Clock Ø  
ALE  
1
4
2
7
Address [15..8] Prev. addr.  
Data/Address [7..0] Prev. data  
WR  
XX  
XX  
Address  
Data  
XX  
XX  
15  
3a 13  
Address  
6
14  
16  
9
3b  
11  
Data/Address [7..0]  
RD  
Address  
5
XX  
Prev. data  
XX  
Data  
10  
8
12  
Note:  
1. The ALE pulse in the last period (T4 - T7) is only present if the next instruction  
accesses the RAM (internal or external). The data and address will only change in T4  
- T7 if ALE is present (the next instruction accesses the RAM).  
137  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Typical  
Analog Comparator offset voltage is measured as absolute offset.  
Characteristics  
Figure 87. Analog Comparator Offset Voltage vs. Common Mode Voltage  
ANALOG COMPARATOR OFFSET VOLTAGE vs.  
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE V = 5V  
CC  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
6
4
2
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE (V)  
Figure 88. Analog Comparator Offset Voltage vs. Common Mode Voltage  
ANALOG COMPARATOR OFFSET VOLTAGE vs.  
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE VCC = 2.7V  
10  
TA = 25˚C  
8
6
4
2
0
TA = 85˚C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE (V)  
138  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 89. Analog Comparator Input Leakage Current  
ANALOG COMPARATOR INPUT LEAKAGE CURRENT  
V
CC = 6V TA = 25˚C  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
-10  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
6.5  
7
VIN (V)  
Figure 90. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. VCC  
1600  
1400  
1200  
1000  
800  
600  
400  
200  
0
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
VCC (V)  
Sink and source capabilities of I/O ports are measured on one pin at a time.  
139  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Figure 91. Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage  
PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 5V  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
VOP (V)  
Figure 92. Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage  
PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 2.7V  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VOP (V)  
140  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 93. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
V
CC = 5V  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VOL (V)  
Figure 94. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
V
CC  
= 5V  
20  
18  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
6
4
2
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
VOH (V)  
141  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Figure 95. I/O Pin Sink Current vs. Output Voltage  
I/O PIN SINK CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
V
CC = 2.7V  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
0
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
VOL (V)  
Figure 96. I/O Pin Source Current vs. Output Voltage  
I/O PIN SOURCE CURRENT vs. OUTPUT VOLTAGE  
VCC = 2.7V  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TA = 25˚C  
TA = 85˚C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
VOH (V)  
142  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Figure 97. I/O Pin Input Threshold vs. VCC  
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
TA = 25˚C  
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
2.7  
4.0  
5.0  
VCC  
Figure 98. I/O Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC  
I/O PIN INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. VCC  
TA = 25˚C  
0.18  
0.16  
0.14  
0.12  
0.1  
0.08  
0.06  
0.04  
0.02  
0
2.7  
4.0  
5.0  
VCC  
143  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Register Summary  
Address  
Name  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Page  
$3F ($5F)  
$3E ($5E)  
$3D ($5D)  
$3C ($5C)  
$3B ($5B)  
$3A ($5A)  
$39 ($59)  
$38 ($58)  
$37 ($57)  
$36 ($56)  
$35 ($55)  
$34 ($54)  
$33 ($53)  
$32 ($52)  
$31 ($51)  
$30 ($50)  
$2F ($4F)  
$2E ($4E)  
$2D ($4D)  
$2C ($4C)  
$2B ($4B)  
$2A ($4A)  
$29 ($49)  
$28 ($48)  
$27 ($47)  
$26 ($46)  
$25 ($45)  
$24 ($44)  
$23 ($43)  
$22 ($42)  
$21 ($41)  
$20 ($40)  
$1F ($3F)  
$1E ($3E)  
$1D ($3D)  
$1C ($3C)  
$1B ($3B)  
$1A ($3A)  
$19 ($39)  
$18 ($38)  
$17 ($37)  
$16 ($36)  
$15 ($35)  
$14 ($34)  
$13 ($33)  
$12 ($32)  
$11 ($31)  
$10 ($30)  
$0F ($2F)  
$0E ($2E)  
$0D ($2D)  
$0C ($2C)  
$0B ($2B)  
$0A ($2A)  
$09 ($29)  
$08 ($28)  
$07 ($27)  
$06 ($26)  
$05 ($25)  
$04 ($24)  
$03 ($23)  
$02 ($22)  
$01 ($21)  
$00 ($20)  
SREG  
SPH  
I
T
H
S
V
N
Z
C
page 21  
page 22  
page 22  
SP15  
SP7  
SP14  
SP6  
SP13  
SP5  
SP12  
SP4  
SP11  
SP3  
SP10  
SP2  
SP9  
SP1  
SP8  
SP0  
SPL  
Reserved  
GIMSK  
GIFR  
INT1  
INTF1  
TOIE1  
TOV1  
-
INT0  
INTF0  
OCIE1A  
OCF1A  
-
INT2  
INTF2  
OCIE1B  
OCF1B  
-
-
-
-
-
-
page 30  
page 31  
page 31  
page 33  
page 114  
page 36  
page 34  
page 29  
page 42  
page 44  
page 44  
page 39  
page 50  
page 52  
page 53  
page 53  
page 54  
page 54  
page 54  
page 54  
page 42  
page 47  
page 54  
page 54  
page 44  
page 44  
page 58  
page 78  
page 60  
page 60  
page 60  
page 61  
page 89  
page 89  
page 89  
page 91  
page 91  
page 91  
page 98  
page 98  
page 98  
page 100  
page 100  
page 100  
page 68  
page 67  
page 66  
page 73  
page 73  
page 75  
page 78  
page 81  
page 106  
page 106  
page 106  
TIMSK  
TIFR  
TOIE2  
TOV2  
-
TICIE1  
ICF1  
OCIE2  
OCFI2  
PGWRT  
SRW00  
ISC10  
TOIE0  
TOV0  
OCIE0  
OCIF0  
SPMEN  
ISC2  
SPMCR  
EMCUCR  
MCUCR  
MCUSR  
TCCR0  
TCNT0  
OCR0  
LBSET  
SRW01  
ISC11  
WDRF  
CTC0  
PGERS  
SRW11  
ISC01  
EXTRF  
CS01  
SM0  
SRE  
-
SRL2  
SRW10  
-
SRL1  
SE  
SRL0  
SM1  
-
ISC00  
PORF  
CS00  
-
BORF  
FOC0  
PWM0  
COM01  
COM00  
CS02  
Timer/Counter0 Counter Register  
Timer/Counter0 Output Compare Register  
SFIOR  
TCCR1A  
TCCR1B  
TCNT1H  
TCNT1L  
OCR1AH  
OCR1AL  
OCR1BH  
OCR1BL  
TCCR2  
ASSR  
-
-
-
-
-
-
PSR2  
PWM11  
CS11  
PSR10  
PWM10  
CS10  
COM1A1  
ICNC1  
COM1A0  
ICES1  
COM1B1  
-
COM1B0  
-
FOC1A  
CTC1  
FOC1B  
CS12  
Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Counter Register Low Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register A Low Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Output Compare Register B Low Byte  
FOC2  
-
PWM2  
-
COM21  
-
COM20  
-
CTC2  
AS20  
CS22  
CS21  
CS20  
TCON2UB  
OCR2UB  
TCR2UB  
ICR1H  
ICR1L  
Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register High Byte  
Timer/Counter1 - Input Capture Register Low Byte  
Timer/Counter2 Counter Register  
TCNT2  
OCR2  
Timer/Counter2 Output Compare Register  
WDTCR  
UBRRHI  
EEARH  
EEARL  
EEDR  
-
-
-
-
-
WDTOE  
WDE  
WDP2  
-
WDP1  
WDP0  
UBRR1[11:8]  
UBRR0[11:8]  
-
-
-
-
EEAR8  
EEPROM Address Register Low Byte  
EEPROM Data Register  
EECR  
-
-
-
-
EERIE  
PORTA3  
DDA3  
EEMWE  
PORTA2  
DDA2  
EEWE  
PORTA1  
DDA1  
EERE  
PORTA0  
DDA0  
PORTA  
DDRA  
PORTA7  
DDA7  
PORTA6  
DDA6  
PORTA5  
DDA5  
PORTA4  
DDA4  
PINA  
PINA7  
PORTB7  
DDB7  
PINA6  
PORTB6  
DDB6  
PINA5  
PORTB5  
DDB5  
PINA4  
PORTB4  
DDB4  
PINA3  
PINA2  
PINA1  
PINA0  
PORTB  
DDRB  
PORTB3  
DDB3  
PORTB2  
DDB2  
PORTB1  
DDB1  
PORTB0  
DDB0  
PINB  
PINB7  
PORTC7  
DDC7  
PINB6  
PORTC6  
DDC6  
PINB5  
PORTC5  
DDC5  
PINB4  
PORTC4  
DDC4  
PINB3  
PINB2  
PINB1  
PINB0  
PORTC  
DDRC  
PORTC3  
DDC3  
PORTC2  
DDC2  
PORTC1  
DDC1  
PORTC0  
DDC0  
PINC  
PINC7  
PORTD7  
DDD7  
PINC6  
PORTD6  
DDD6  
PINC5  
PORTD5  
DDD5  
PINC4  
PORTD4  
DDD4  
PINC3  
PINC2  
PINC1  
PINC0  
PORTD0  
DDD0  
PORTD  
DDRD  
PORTD3  
DDD3  
PORTD2  
DDD2  
PORTD1  
DDD1  
PIND  
PIND7  
PIND6  
PIND5  
PIND4  
PIND3  
PIND2  
PIND1  
PIND0  
SPDR  
SPI Data Register  
SPSR  
SPIF  
SPIE  
WCOL  
SPE  
-
-
-
-
-
SPI2X  
SPR0  
SPCR  
DORD  
MSTR  
CPOL  
CPHA  
SPR1  
UDR0  
UART0 I/O Data Register  
UCSR0A  
UCSR0B  
UBRR0  
ACSR  
RXC0  
TXC0  
UDRE0  
UDRIE0  
FE0  
OR0  
-
U2X0  
MPCM0  
TXB80  
RXCIE0  
TXCIE0  
RXEN0  
TXEN0  
CHR90  
RXB80  
UART0 Baud Rate Register  
ACD  
AINBG  
ACO  
ACI  
ACIE  
ACIC  
PORTE2  
DDE2  
ACIS1  
PORTE1  
DDE1  
ACIS0  
PORTE0  
DDE0  
PORTE  
DDRE  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PINE  
PINE2  
PINE1  
PINE0  
Reserved  
UDR1  
UART1 I/O Data Register  
page 73  
page 75  
page 73  
page 78  
UCSR1A  
UCSR1B  
UBRR1  
RXC1  
TXC1  
UDRE1  
UDRIE1  
FE1  
OR1  
-
U2X1  
MPCM1  
TXB81  
RXCIE1  
TXCIE1  
RXEN1  
TXEN1  
CHR91  
RXB81  
UART1 Baud Rate Register  
144  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Notes: 1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses  
should never be written.  
2. Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical “1” to them. Note that the CBI and SBI instructions will operate on  
all bits in the I/O Register, writing a one back into any flag read as set, thus clearing the flag. The CBI and SBI instructions  
work with registers $00 to $1F only.  
145  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Instruction Set Summary  
Mnemonic  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
# Clocks  
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS  
ADD  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rdl, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rdl, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd  
Add Two Registers  
Rd Rd + Rr  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,S  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V,S  
Z,N,V  
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
ADC  
Add with Carry Two Registers  
Add Immediate to Word  
Subtract Two Registers  
Subtract Constant from Register  
Subtract with Carry Two Registers  
Subtract with Carry Constant from Reg.  
Subtract Immediate from Word  
Logical AND Registers  
Logical AND Register and Constant  
Logical OR Registers  
Rd Rd + Rr + C  
Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl + K  
Rd Rd - Rr  
ADIW  
SUB  
SUBI  
SBC  
Rd Rd - K  
Rd Rd - Rr - C  
Rd Rd - K - C  
Rdh:Rdl Rdh:Rdl - K  
Rd Rd Rr  
SBCI  
SBIW  
AND  
ANDI  
OR  
Rd Rd K  
Z,N,V  
Rd Rd v Rr  
Z,N,V  
ORI  
Logical OR Register and Constant  
Exclusive OR Registers  
One’s Complement  
Rd Rd v K  
Z,N,V  
EOR  
COM  
NEG  
SBR  
Rd Rd Rr  
Z,N,V  
Rd $FF - Rd  
Rd $00 - Rd  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,N,V  
Rd  
Two’s Complement  
Rd, K  
Rd, K  
Rd  
Set Bit(s) in Register  
Rd Rd v K  
CBR  
Clear Bit(s) in Register  
Increment  
Rd Rd ($FF - K)  
Rd Rd + 1  
Z,N,V  
INC  
Z,N,V  
DEC  
Rd  
Decrement  
Rd Rd - 1  
Z,N,V  
TST  
Rd  
Test for Zero or Minus  
Clear Register  
Rd Rd Rd  
Z,N,V  
CLR  
Rd  
Rd Rd Rd  
Rd $FF  
Z,N,V  
SER  
Rd  
Set Register  
None  
MUL  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Multiply Unsigned  
R1:R0 Rd x Rr  
R1:R0 Rd x Rr  
R1:R0 Rd x Rr  
R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1  
R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1  
R1:R0 (Rd x Rr) << 1  
Z,C  
MULS  
MULSU  
FMUL  
FMULS  
FMULSU  
Multiply Signed  
Z,C  
Multiply Signed with Unsigned  
Fractional Multiply Unsigned  
Fractional Multiply Signed  
Fractional Multiply Signed with Unsigned  
Z,C  
Z,C  
Z,C  
Z,C  
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS  
RJMP  
IJMP  
k
Relative Jump  
PC PC + k + 1  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
I
2
2
Indirect Jump to (Z)  
PC Z  
JMP  
k
k
Direct Jump  
PC k  
3
RCALL  
ICALL  
CALL  
RET  
Relative Subroutine Call  
Indirect Call to (Z)  
PC PC + k + 1  
3
PC Z  
3
k
Direct Subroutine Call  
Subroutine Return  
PC k  
4
PC STACK  
4
RETI  
Interrupt Return  
PC STACK  
4
CPSE  
CP  
Rd, Rr  
Compare, Skip if Equal  
Compare  
if (Rd = Rr) PC PC + 2 or 3  
Rd - Rr  
None  
Z,N,V,C,H  
Z,N,V,C,H  
Z,N,V,C,H  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1/2/3  
1
Rd, Rr  
CPC  
Rd, Rr  
Compare with Carry  
Rd - Rr - C  
1
CPI  
Rd, K  
Compare Register with Immediate  
Skip if Bit in Register Cleared  
Skip if Bit in Register is Set  
Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared  
Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set  
Branch if Status Flag Set  
Branch if Status Flag Cleared  
Branch if Equal  
Rd - K  
1
SBRC  
SBRS  
SBIC  
SBIS  
Rr, b  
if (Rr(b) = 0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (Rr(b) = 1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (P(b) = 0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (P(b) = 1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (SREG(s) = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (SREG(s) = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (Z = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (Z = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
Rr, b  
P, b  
P, b  
s, k  
s, k  
k
BRBS  
BRBC  
BREQ  
BRNE  
BRCS  
BRCC  
BRSH  
BRLO  
BRMI  
BRPL  
BRGE  
BRLT  
BRHS  
BRHC  
k
Branch if Not Equal  
k
Branch if Carry Set  
k
Branch if Carry Cleared  
Branch if Same or Higher  
Branch if Lower  
k
k
k
Branch if Minus  
k
Branch if Plus  
k
Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed  
Branch if Less than Zero, Signed  
Branch if Half-carry Flag Set  
Branch if Half-carry Flag Cleared  
k
k
k
146  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Instruction Set Summary (Continued)  
Mnemonic  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
# Clocks  
BRTS  
BRTC  
BRVS  
BRVC  
BRIE  
k
k
k
k
k
k
Branch if T-flag Set  
if (T = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (T = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (I = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (I = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
Branch if T-flag Cleared  
Branch if Overflow Flag is Set  
Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared  
Branch if Interrupt Enabled  
Branch if Interrupt Disabled  
BRID  
DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS  
MOV  
MOVW  
LDI  
LD  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Move between Registers  
Copy Register Word  
Rd Rr  
Rd+1:Rd Rr+1:Rr  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
-
Load Immediate  
Rd K  
Rd, X  
Load Indirect  
Rd (X)  
LD  
Rd, X+  
Rd, -X  
Rd, Y  
Load Indirect and Post-inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Load Indirect  
Rd (X), X X + 1  
X X - 1, Rd (X)  
Rd (Y)  
LD  
LD  
LD  
Rd, Y+  
Rd, -Y  
Rd, Y+q  
Rd, Z  
Load Indirect and Post-inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Load Indirect with Displacement  
Load Indirect  
Rd (Y), Y Y + 1  
Y Y - 1, Rd (Y)  
Rd (Y + q)  
Rd (Z)  
LD  
LDD  
LD  
LD  
Rd, Z+  
Rd, -Z  
Rd, Z+q  
Rd, k  
Load Indirect and Post-inc.  
Load Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Load Indirect with Displacement  
Load Direct from SRAM  
Store Indirect  
Rd (Z), Z Z + 1  
Z Z - 1, Rd (Z)  
Rd (Z + q)  
Rd (k)  
LD  
LDD  
LDS  
ST  
X, Rr  
(X) Rr  
ST  
X+, Rr  
-X, Rr  
Y, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Store Indirect  
(X) Rr, X X + 1  
X X - 1, (X) Rr  
(Y) Rr  
ST  
ST  
ST  
Y+, Rr  
-Y, Rr  
Y+q, Rr  
Z, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Store Indirect with Displacement  
Store Indirect  
(Y) Rr, Y Y + 1  
Y Y - 1, (Y) Rr  
(Y + q) Rr  
ST  
STD  
ST  
(Z) Rr  
ST  
Z+, Rr  
-Z, Rr  
Z+q, Rr  
k, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-inc.  
Store Indirect and Pre-dec.  
Store Indirect with Displacement  
Store Direct to SRAM  
Load Program Memory  
Load Program Memory  
Load Program Memory and Post-inc.  
Store Program Memory  
In Port  
(Z) Rr, Z Z + 1  
Z Z - 1, (Z) Rr  
(Z + q) Rr  
ST  
STD  
STS  
LPM  
LPM  
LPM  
SPM  
IN  
(k) Rr  
R0 (Z)  
Rd, Z  
Rd (Z)  
Rd, Z+  
Rd (Z), Z Z + 1  
(Z) R1:R0  
Rd, P  
P, Rr  
Rr  
Rd P  
1
1
2
2
OUT  
PUSH  
POP  
Out Port  
P Rr  
Push Register on Stack  
Pop Register from Stack  
STACK Rr  
Rd STACK  
Rd  
BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS  
SBI  
P, b  
P, b  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
s
Set Bit in I/O Register  
Clear Bit in I/O Register  
Logical Shift Left  
I/O(P,b) 1  
None  
None  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
None  
SREG(s)  
SREG(s)  
T
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CBI  
I/O(P,b) 0  
LSL  
Rd(n+1) Rd(n), Rd(0) 0  
LSR  
ROL  
ROR  
ASR  
SWAP  
BSET  
BCLR  
BST  
BLD  
SEC  
CLC  
SEN  
CLN  
Logical Shift Right  
Rotate Left through Carry  
Rotate Right through Carry  
Arithmetic Shift Right  
Swap Nibbles  
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), Rd(7) 0  
Rd(0) C, Rd(n+1) Rd(n), C Rd(7)  
Rd(7) C, Rd(n) Rd(n+1), C Rd(0)  
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), n = 0..6  
Rd(3..0) Rd(7..4), Rd(7..4) Rd(3..0)  
Flag Set  
SREG(s) 1  
SREG(s) 0  
T Rr(b)  
Rd(b) T  
C 1  
s
Flag Clear  
Rr, b  
Rd, b  
Bit Store from Register to T  
Bit Load from T to Register  
Set Carry  
None  
C
Clear Carry  
C 0  
C
Set Negative Flag  
Clear Negative Flag  
N 1  
N
N 0  
N
147  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Instruction Set Summary (Continued)  
Mnemonic  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
# Clocks  
SEZ  
CLZ  
SEI  
Set Zero Flag  
Z 1  
Z 0  
I 1  
Z
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
Clear Zero Flag  
Z
Global Interrupt Enable  
Global Interrupt Disable  
Set Signed Test Flag  
Clear Signed Test Flag  
Set Two’s Complement Overflow  
Clear Two’s Complement Overflow  
Set T in SREG  
I
CLI  
I 0  
I
SES  
CLS  
SEV  
CLV  
SET  
CLT  
SEH  
CLH  
NOP  
SLEEP  
WDR  
S 1  
S 0  
V 1  
V 0  
T 1  
T 0  
H 1  
H 0  
S
S
V
V
T
Clear T in SREG  
T
Set Half-carry Flag in SREG  
Clear Half-carry Flag in SREG  
No Operation  
H
H
None  
None  
None  
Sleep  
(see specific descr. for Sleep function)  
(see specific descr. for WDR/timer)  
Watchdog Reset  
148  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
Ordering Information  
Speed (MHz)  
Power Supply  
Ordering Code  
Package  
Operation Range  
4
2.7 - 5.5V  
ATmega161-4AC  
ATmega161-4PC  
44A  
Commercial  
40P6  
(0°C to 70°C)  
ATmega161-4AI  
ATmega161-4PI  
44A  
Industrial  
40P6  
(-40°C to 85°C)  
8
4.0 - 5.5V  
ATmega161-8AC  
ATmega161-8PC  
44A  
Commercial  
40P6  
(0°C to 70°C)  
ATmega161-8AI  
ATmega161-8PI  
44A  
Industrial  
40P6  
(-40°C to 85°C)  
Note:  
This device can also be supplied in wafer form. Please contact your local Atmel sales office for detailed ordering information and  
minimum quantities.  
Package Type  
44-lead, Thin (1.0 mm) Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP)  
40-lead, 0.600" Wide, Plastic Dual Inline Package (PDIP)  
44A  
40P6  
149  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Packaging Information  
44A  
PIN 1  
B
PIN 1 IDENTIFIER  
E1  
E
e
D1  
D
C
0˚~7˚  
A2  
A
A1  
L
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = mm)  
MIN  
MAX  
1.20  
NOM  
NOTE  
SYMBOL  
A
A1  
A2  
D
0.05  
0.95  
11.75  
9.90  
11.75  
9.90  
0.30  
0.09  
0.45  
0.15  
1.00  
12.00  
10.00  
12.00  
10.00  
1.05  
12.25  
D1  
E
10.10 Note 2  
12.25  
Notes:  
1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-026, Variation ACB.  
2. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold protrusion. Allowable  
protrusion is 0.25 mm per side. Dimensions D1 and E1 are maximum  
plastic body size dimensions including mold mismatch.  
E1  
B
10.10 Note 2  
0.45  
C
0.20  
3. Lead coplanarity is 0.10 mm maximum.  
L
0.75  
e
0.80 TYP  
10/5/2001  
TITLE  
DRAWING NO. REV.  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131  
44A, 44-lead, 10 x 10 mm Body Size, 1.0 mm Body Thickness,  
0.8 mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP)  
44A  
B
R
150  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
40P6  
PIN 1  
B
PIN 1 IDENTIFIER  
E1  
E
e
D1  
D
C
0˚~7˚  
A2  
A
A1  
L
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = mm)  
MIN  
MAX  
1.20  
NOM  
NOTE  
SYMBOL  
A
A1  
A2  
D
0.05  
0.95  
11.75  
9.90  
11.75  
9.90  
0.30  
0.09  
0.45  
0.15  
1.00  
12.00  
10.00  
12.00  
10.00  
1.05  
12.25  
D1  
E
10.10 Note 2  
12.25  
Notes:  
1. This package conforms to JEDEC reference MS-026, Variation ACB.  
2. Dimensions D1 and E1 do not include mold protrusion. Allowable  
protrusion is 0.25 mm per side. Dimensions D1 and E1 are maximum  
plastic body size dimensions including mold mismatch.  
E1  
B
10.10 Note 2  
0.45  
C
0.20  
3. Lead coplanarity is 0.10 mm maximum.  
L
0.75  
e
0.80 TYP  
10/5/2001  
TITLE  
DRAWING NO. REV.  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131  
44A, 44-lead, 10 x 10 mm Body Size, 1.0 mm Body Thickness,  
0.8 mm Lead Pitch, Thin Profile Plastic Quad Flat Package (TQFP)  
44A  
B
R
151  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Errata  
ATmega161 Rev. E  
PWM not Phase Correct  
Increased Interrupt Latency  
Interrupt Return Fails when Stack Pointer Addresses the External Memory  
Writing UBBRH Affects both UART0 and UART1  
Store Program Memory Instruction May Fail  
5. PWM not Phase Correct  
In phase correct PWM mode, a change from OCRx = TOP to anything less than  
TOP does not change the OCx output. This gives a phase error in the following  
period.  
Problem Fix/Workaround  
Make sure this issue is not harmful to the application.  
4. Increased Interrupt Latency  
In this device, some instructions are not interruptable, and will cause the interrupt  
latency to increase. The only practical problem concerns a loop followed by a two-  
word instruction while waiting for an interrupt. The loop may consist of a branch  
instruction or an absolute or relative jump back to itself like this:  
loop: rjmp loop  
<Two-word instruction>  
In this case, a dead-lock situation arises.  
Problem Fix/Workaround  
In assembly, insert a nop instruction immediately after a loop to itself. The problem  
will normally be detected during development. In C, the only construct that will give  
this problem is an empty “for” loop; “for(;;)”. Use “while(1)” or “do{} while (1)” to avoid  
the problem.  
3. Interrupt Return Fails when Stack Pointer Addresses the External Memory  
When Stack Pointer addresses external memory (SPH:SPL > $45F), returning from  
interrupt will fail. The program counter will be updated with a wrong value and thus  
the program flow will be corrupted.  
Problem Fix/Workaround  
Address the stack pointer to internal SRAM or disable interrupts while Stack Pointer  
addresses external memory.  
2. Writing UBBRH Affects Both UART0 and UART1  
Writing UBRRHI updates baud rate generator for both UART0 and UART1. The  
baud rate generator's counter is updated each time either UBRR or UBRRHI are  
written. Since the UBRRHI regiSter is shared by UART0 and UART1, changing the  
baud rate for one UART will affect the operation of the other UART.  
Problem Fix/Workaround  
Do not update UBRRHI for one UART when transmitting/receiving data on the  
other.  
152  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
 
ATmega161(L)  
1. Store Program Memory Instruction May Fail  
At certain frequencies and voltages, the store program memory (SPM) instruction  
may fail.  
Problem Fix/Workaround  
Avoid using the SPM instruction.  
153  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Data Sheet Change  
Log for ATmega161  
This document contains a log on the changes made to the data sheet for ATmega161.  
Changes from Rev.  
1228C-08/02 to Rev.  
1228D-02/07  
1
2
Package Drawing updated from rev. A to rev. B.  
Written “Not recommend in new designs” on features page.  
Changes from Rev.  
1228B-09/01 to Rev.  
1228C-08/02  
All page numbers refers to this document.  
Description of Brown-out Detector (BOD) removed from data sheet.  
1
154  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
ATmega161(L)  
Table of Contents  
Features................................................................................................. 1  
Disclaimer.............................................................................................. 1  
Pin Configuration.................................................................................. 2  
Description............................................................................................ 3  
Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 4  
Pin Descriptions.................................................................................................... 5  
Crystal Oscillator................................................................................................... 6  
Architectural Overview......................................................................... 7  
The General Purpose Register File .................................................................... 10  
ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit................................................................................ 11  
Self-programmable Flash Program Memory....................................................... 11  
EEPROM Data Memory...................................................................................... 11  
SRAM Data Memory........................................................................................... 12  
Program and Data Addressing Modes................................................................ 13  
Memory Access Times and Instruction Execution Timing .................................. 17  
l/O Memory ......................................................................................................... 19  
Reset and Interrupt Handling.............................................................................. 22  
MCU Control Register – MCUCR ....................................................................... 34  
Sleep Modes....................................................................................................... 36  
Timer/Counters ................................................................................... 38  
Timer/Counter Prescalers................................................................................... 38  
8-bit Timer/Counters T/C0 and T/C2 .................................................................. 40  
Timer/Counter1................................................................................................... 49  
Watchdog Timer.................................................................................. 58  
EEPROM Read/Write Access............................................................. 60  
Prevent EEPROM Corruption............................................................................. 62  
Serial Peripheral Interface – SPI........................................................ 63  
SS Pin Functionality............................................................................................ 65  
Data Modes ........................................................................................................ 65  
UARTs.................................................................................................. 69  
Data Transmission.............................................................................................. 69  
Data Reception................................................................................................... 71  
UART Control ..................................................................................................... 73  
Baud Rate Generator.......................................................................................... 76  
Double-speed Transmission............................................................................... 78  
Analog Comparator ............................................................................ 81  
i
1228D–AVR–02/07  
 
Internal Voltage Reference ................................................................ 83  
Voltage Reference Enable Signals and Start-up Time ....................................... 83  
Interface to External Memory ............................................................ 84  
Using the External Memory Interface ................................................................. 88  
I/O Ports............................................................................................... 89  
Port A.................................................................................................................. 89  
Port B.................................................................................................................. 91  
Port B Schematics .............................................................................................. 94  
Port C.................................................................................................................. 98  
Port D................................................................................................................ 100  
Port E................................................................................................................ 106  
Memory Programming...................................................................... 110  
Boot Loader Support......................................................................................... 110  
Entering the Boot Loader Program................................................................... 111  
Capabilities of the Boot Loader......................................................................... 112  
Self-programming the Flash ............................................................................. 112  
Program Memory Lock bits ............................................................. 116  
Fuse bits ........................................................................................................... 116  
Signature Bytes ................................................................................................ 117  
Programming the Flash and EEPROM............................................................. 117  
Parallel Programming ....................................................................................... 118  
Parallel Programming Characteristics .............................................................. 124  
Serial Downloading........................................................................................... 125  
Serial Programming Characteristics ................................................................. 129  
Electrical Characteristics................................................................. 130  
Absolute Maximum Ratings*............................................................................. 130  
DC Characteristics............................................................................ 131  
External Clock Drive Waveforms...................................................................... 132  
External Data Memory Timing .......................................................................... 133  
Typical Characteristics .................................................................... 138  
Register Summary............................................................................ 144  
Instruction Set Summary ................................................................. 146  
Ordering Information........................................................................ 149  
Packaging Information..................................................................... 150  
44A ................................................................................................................... 150  
ii  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
ATmega161(L)  
40P6 ................................................................................................................. 151  
Errata ................................................................................................. 152  
ATmega161 Rev. E .......................................................................................... 152  
Data Sheet Change Log for ATmega161 ........................................ 154  
Changes from Rev. 1228B-09/01 to Rev. 1228C-08/02................................... 154  
Table of Contents .................................................................................. i  
iii  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
iv  
ATmega161(L)  
1228D–AVR–02/07  
Atmel Corporation  
Atmel Operations  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131, USA  
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311  
Fax: 1(408) 487-2600  
Memory  
RF/Automotive  
Theresienstrasse 2  
Postfach 3535  
74025 Heilbronn, Germany  
Tel: (49) 71-31-67-0  
Fax: (49) 71-31-67-2340  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131, USA  
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311  
Fax: 1(408) 436-4314  
Regional Headquarters  
Microcontrollers  
2325 Orchard Parkway  
San Jose, CA 95131, USA  
Tel: 1(408) 441-0311  
Fax: 1(408) 436-4314  
1150 East Cheyenne Mtn. Blvd.  
Colorado Springs, CO 80906, USA  
Tel: 1(719) 576-3300  
Europe  
Atmel Sarl  
Route des Arsenaux 41  
Case Postale 80  
CH-1705 Fribourg  
Switzerland  
Tel: (41) 26-426-5555  
Fax: (41) 26-426-5500  
Fax: 1(719) 540-1759  
Biometrics/Imaging/Hi-Rel MPU/  
High Speed Converters/RF Datacom  
Avenue de Rochepleine  
La Chantrerie  
BP 70602  
44306 Nantes Cedex 3, France  
Tel: (33) 2-40-18-18-18  
Fax: (33) 2-40-18-19-60  
BP 123  
38521 Saint-Egreve Cedex, France  
Tel: (33) 4-76-58-30-00  
Fax: (33) 4-76-58-34-80  
Asia  
Room 1219  
Chinachem Golden Plaza  
77 Mody Road Tsimshatsui  
East Kowloon  
Hong Kong  
Tel: (852) 2721-9778  
Fax: (852) 2722-1369  
ASIC/ASSP/Smart Cards  
Zone Industrielle  
13106 Rousset Cedex, France  
Tel: (33) 4-42-53-60-00  
Fax: (33) 4-42-53-60-01  
1150 East Cheyenne Mtn. Blvd.  
Colorado Springs, CO 80906, USA  
Tel: 1(719) 576-3300  
Japan  
9F, Tonetsu Shinkawa Bldg.  
1-24-8 Shinkawa  
Chuo-ku, Tokyo 104-0033  
Japan  
Tel: (81) 3-3523-3551  
Fax: (81) 3-3523-7581  
Fax: 1(719) 540-1759  
Scottish Enterprise Technology Park  
Maxwell Building  
East Kilbride G75 0QR, Scotland  
Tel: (44) 1355-803-000  
Fax: (44) 1355-242-743  
Literature Requests  
www.atmel.com/literature  
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any  
intellectual property right is granted by this document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN ATMELS TERMS AND CONDI-  
TIONS OF SALE LOCATED ON ATMELS WEB SITE, ATMEL ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY  
WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDEN-  
TAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF INFORMATION) ARISING OUT  
OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no  
representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications  
and product descriptions at any time without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided  
otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in, automotive applications. Atmel’s products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use  
as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.  
© 2007 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved. ATMEL®, logo and combinations thereof, Everywhere You Are®, AVR®, AVR Studio®, and oth-  
ers, are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel Corporation or its subsidiaries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of oth-  
ATMEL® and AVR® are the registered trademarks of Atmel.  
ers.  
Other terms and product names may be the trademarks of others.  
1228D–AVR–02/07  

相关型号:

ATMEGA161_07

8-bit Microcontroller with 16K Bytes of In-System Programmable Flash
ATMEL

ATMEGA162

8-Bit AVR Microcontroller with 16K Bytes In-System ProgrammableFlash
ATMEL

ATMEGA162-16AI

8-Bit AVR Microcontroller with 16K Bytes In-System ProgrammableFlash
ATMEL

ATMEGA162-16AU

8-bit Microcontroller with 16K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
ATMEL

ATMEGA162-16AU

IC MCU 8BIT 16KB FLASH 44TQFP
MICROCHIP

ATMEGA162-16AU-SL383

Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, AVR RISC CPU, 16MHz, CMOS, PQFP44, 10 X 10 MM, 1 MM HEIGHT, 0.80 MM PITCH, GREEN, PLASTIC, MS-026ACB, TQFP-44
ATMEL

ATMEGA162-16AUR

IC MCU 8BIT 16KB FLASH 44TQFP
MICROCHIP

ATMEGA162-16MI

8-Bit AVR Microcontroller with 16K Bytes In-System ProgrammableFlash
ATMEL

ATMEGA162-16MU

8-bit Microcontroller with 16K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
ATMEL

ATMEGA162-16MU

IC MCU 8BIT 16KB FLASH 44VQFN
MICROCHIP

ATMEGA162-16PI

8-Bit AVR Microcontroller with 16K Bytes In-System ProgrammableFlash
ATMEL

ATMEGA162-16PU

8-bit Microcontroller with 16K Bytes In-System Programmable Flash
ATMEL